New Final Sami To Be Print With Cover

RIFT VALLEY UNIVERSITY
FACULTY OF TECHNOLOGY
DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING
Project on Structural Analysis and Design of B+G+4 Mixed-Use

Building as Partial Fulfillment of the Award of Bsc. Degree in Civil
Engineering
By; -
SAMUEL OFKELA
HABTAMU ENDALE
BIRHAN TEFERI
AYMEN TEKLU
DANIEL TESHOM
DAGMAWIT GIRMACHEW
ADVISOR: -
Mr. ABU GEMECHU (Msc.)
SEPTEMBER, 2020 G.C

Declaration
We hereby declare that this report paper submitted to Rift valley University faculty of Technology,
Department of Civil Engineering is our original work. It was prepared and submitted to the department
as a fulfillment of the fifth year BSC thesis. The matter embodied in this project report has not been
submitted to any other university or institute. This paper is our original work and has not been presented
before.
Name Signature Date
1. Samuel Ofkela ____________________ ____________________

2. Habtamu Endale ____________________ ____________________
3. Aymen Teklu ____________________ ____________________
4. Birhan Teferi ____________________ ____________________
5. Dagmawit Giremachew ____________________ ____________________
6. Daniel Teshome ____________________ ____________________
Advisor Name
Mr. Abu Gemechu (MSc)
Signature:-_____________________
Date:-___________________________
Structural Analysis And Design Of B+G+4 Mixed Use Building 2020 G.C.
Abstract
This paper is intended to the analysis and design of B+G+4 mixed use building intended to provide
shop, cafe and restaurant, office and pension services etc. The proposed building is located within
Adama town and The design philosophy adopted for the project is the limit state design for all
aspects or parts of the structure mainly according to Ethiopian Building Code of Standards
(EBCS) – 1995.
The project document contains Ten Chapters and the contents and the duties accomplished in each
chapter are explained below and finally I list some sample detailing in Appendix.
The First Chapter is introduction about structural design and it also states the design constants used for
the design of the building .The Second chapter deals about the wind load analysis for solid slab roofs.
The external wind pressure coming from different directions were collected and transferred to frames
according to EBCS, 1995. The Third chapter focuses on the analysis and design of slabs; all the slabs are
solid slabs. The depths of all the slabs are made the same for construction simplicity and reinforcement
of each is determined using EBCS2, 1995. And the Forth chapter is staircases .The Fifths chapter is
about the calculation of lateral forces which are earthquakes loads and wind load on walls. The weight
of the building was computed by considering all elements from small to large. The center of mass and
center of stiffness were computed by assuming preliminary sections. Finally, by accounting the torsional
effects, the lateral forces were distributed to each floor and subsequently to frame joints according to
their stiffness. The Sixth chapter deals on the analysis of the frame of the structure. The building model
was analyzed were accomplished by employing ETABS design software.
The Seventh chapter deals with beam design for flexure, shear and torsion. The Eighth chapter deals
with column design. Columns at one axis have been checked whether they sway or non-sway and
whether they are slender or short. For columns which are slender we magnified the first order moment
by multiplying it with the slenderness factor. The Ninth chapter deals with foundation design. We have
calculated the bearing capacity of the soil profile on which our building is going to build. According to
the bearing capacity of the soil we have determined the required width of footing for all the isolated
footings using the serviceability combination And. The depth of the footings and the required area of
reinforcement are calculated using the envelope combination and the maximum stress produced by each
footing is checked whether they are less than the ultimate bearing capacity of the soil which is 250Kpa.
Finally the Tenth chapter we can put conclusion and recommendation at we see during preparing our
paper, In Addition to this we listed up Reference that we are used.

I
DEPARTEMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING
Acknowledgment
Our greatest thanks to Almighty GOD from the depth of our heart for endowing us with the
courage, strength as well as health for the successful accomplishment of this project during these
Covid-19 pandemic viruses time. Next we would like to express our deepest gratitude and
respect to our project advisor Instructor Abu Gemechu (MSc) we want to thanks him for his
dedication and time devotion on guiding in virtual through telegram and other means for the
progress of the project work.
Last, but not least the support of our parents is invaluable in shaping us to the best of their
capacity in a disciplined manner to develop self-confidence, believe in our own ability and not to
give up under this difficult situations.

II
Table of Content
ABSTRACT.................................................................................................................................... I
ACKNOWLEDGMENT .............................................................................................................. II
TABLE OF CONTENT ..............................................................................................................III
LIST OF FIGURE ...................................................................................................................... VI
LIST OF TABLE ....................................................................................................................... VII
ACRONYM ................................................................................................................................. IX
CHAPTER 1 ...................................................................................................................................1
1. INTRODUCTION .......................................................................................................................1
1.1. General ......................................................................................................................................1
1.2. Objectives .................................................................................................................................2
1.2.1. General Objectives .......................................................................................................2
1.2.2. Specific objective .........................................................................................................3
1.3. Design data and assumptions ....................................................................................................3
1.4. Design method and reference ...................................................................................................4
CHAPTER TWO ...........................................................................................................................5
2. WIND LOAD ANALYSIS AND ROOF DESIGN.....................................................................5
2.1. Introduction...............................................................................................................................5
2.2. Method of Analysis...................................................................................................................6
2.2.1. Wind load analysis for our building .............................................................................6
2.2.2. Determination of wind pressure .................................................................................10
2.3. Slab roof Design .....................................................................................................................16
2.3.1. Geometry/minimum depth determination ..................................................................17
2.3.2. Analysis of individual panel .......................................................................................26
2.3.3. Check depth for flexure (Ultimate limit state) ...........................................................37
2.3.4. Reinforcement Works ................................................................................................38
2.3.5. Load transfer to beam From Roof Floor slab .............................................................41

III
CHAPTER THREE .....................................................................................................................44

3. DESIGN OF SLAB ...................................................................................................................44
3.1. Objective .................................................................................................................................44
3.2. Solid Slab Design ...................................................................................................................48
3.3. Design solution for Basement floor slab ................................................................................50
3.4. Design solution for Ground floor solid slab ...........................................................................51
3.5. Design solution for First floor solid slab ................................................................................82
3.6. Design solution for 2nd-4th floor solid slab ..........................................................................113
3.6.1. Geometry/minimum depth determination ................................................................114
3.6.2. Moment adjustments ................................................................................................121
3.6.3. Moment adjustments ................................................................................................127
CHAPTER FOUR .....................................................................................................................138
4. STAIR CASE DESIGN ...........................................................................................................138
4.1. Introduction...........................................................................................................................138
4.2. The stair case modeling and analysis ....................................................................................139
4.3. Design of Stair - One (first flight from basement)................................................................140
4.4. Design of Stair - Two (Second flight and above) .................................................................149
CHAPTER-FIVE .......................................................................................................................157
5. LATERAL LOAD ANALYSIS ..............................................................................................157
5.1. Introduction...........................................................................................................................157
5.2. Base shear force determination .............................................................................................158
5.3. Story shear force determination (Fi) .....................................................................................166
5.4. Story shear from wind load...................................................................................................169
5.5. Later load from the governing story shear ............................................................................191
5.5.1. Distribution of story shear to frame system .............................................................191
5.5.2. Calculation of center of mass ...................................................................................191
5.5.3. Determination of center of stiffness .........................................................................192
5.5.4. Shear correction factor .............................................................................................202

IV
CHAPTER SIX ..........................................................................................................................209

6. FRAME ANALYSIS ...............................................................................................................209
6.1. Introduction .................................................................................................................210
6.2. Analysis Solution ........................................................................................................211
CHAPTER SEVEN ...................................................................................................................225
7. BEAM DESIGN ......................................................................................................................225
7.1. Introduction...........................................................................................................................225
7.2. Design Solution ....................................................................................................................227
7.3. Design of beam through X-Direction ...................................................................................228
7.3.1. Design of beam for flexure.......................................................................................228
7.3.2. Beam design for Shear .............................................................................................239
7.3.3. Design for Torsion ...................................................................................................246
CHAPTER EIGHT ....................................................................................................................249
8. COLUMN DESIGN ................................................................................................................249
8.1. Introduction...........................................................................................................................249
8.1.1. Introduction ..............................................................................................................252
8.1.2. Design of Isolated Column.......................................................................................253
CHAPTER NINE .......................................................................................................................266
9. FOUNDATION DESIGN .......................................................................................................266
9.1. Introduction...........................................................................................................................266
9.2. Foundation Design ................................................................................................................268
9.2.1. Design solution .........................................................................................................269
CHAPTER TEN.........................................................................................................................291
10. CONCLUSION AND RECOMMENDATION ....................................................................291
10.1 Conclusion ...........................................................................................................................291
10.2 Recommendation .................................................................................................................292
REFERENCES ............................................................................................................................293

V
List of Figure
Figure 1 Key for Flat Roofs .......................................................................................................... 13
Figure 2 Flat sold slab roof ........................................................................................................... 16
Figure 3 Distribution of load on a beam supporting a two way Spanning slab ............................ 41
Figure 4 Basement Floor Plan....................................................................................................... 50
Figure 5 Adjusted Moment Slab ................................................................................................... 70
Figure 6 𝐴𝑠to be introduced in equation above ............................................................................ 72
Figure 7 Dog leg stair case.......................................................................................................... 138
Figure 8 Stair Case plan and elevation view ............................................................................... 139
Figure 9 landing cross section 1.................................................................................................. 143
Figure 10 Stair case Two ............................................................................................................ 149
Figure 11 Cross section for landing 2 ......................................................................................... 151
Figure 12 Distribution of horizontal seismic force ..................................................................... 168
Figure 13 Distribution of horizontal wind force 00 ..................................................................... 180
Figure 14 Key for vertical wall (EBCS-1/1995, Figure A-3, Page 71) ...................................... 186
Figure 15 local and overall external pressure coefficients for each zone ................................... 187
Figure 16 Distribution of horizontal wind force 900................................................................... 190
Figure 17 Modelling of B+G+4 .................................................................................................. 212
Figure 18 Wall Load Assign ....................................................................................................... 213
Figure 19 Slab Live Load Assign 2nd floor ................................................................................. 214
Figure 20 Partition Wall Load Assign ........................................................................................ 215
Figure 21 Shear 2-2 ..................................................................................................................... 217
Figure 22 Moment 3-3 ................................................................................................................ 219
Figure 23 Axial Load .................................................................................................................. 221
Figure 24 Design Output Area of Steel...................................................................................... 223
Figure 25 Bending Moment Diagram for beam on Axis-A of the second floor ......................... 229
Figure 26 Shear Force Diagram for beam on Axis-A of the second floors ................................ 229
Figure 27 Torsional values for beam on Axis-A of the second floors ........................................ 229
Figure 28 Stress Distribution Diagram ....................................................................................... 275
Figure 29 Critical section for punching shear Footing Type F-1................................................ 277
Figure 30 Critical section for wide beam shear .......................................................................... 279

VI
List of Table
Table 1.Terrain Category and related parameters ........................................................................... 7
Table 2 the Value of Air Density .................................................................................................. 10
Table 3 Summary for depth determination ................................................................................... 24
Table 4 Support reinforcement for Ground floor slab .................................................................. 39
Table 5 Field reinforcement for Ground floor slab ....................................................................... 40
Table 6 Summary for depth determination for Ground floor slab ................................................ 54
Table 7 partition wall loads on the slab ........................................................................................ 56
Table 8 Support reinforcement for Ground floor slab .................................................................. 75
Table 9 Field reinforcement for Ground floor slab ....................................................................... 76
Table 10 Summary for depth determination ................................................................................. 85
Table 11 partition wall loads on the slab ...................................................................................... 87
Table 12 Support reinforcement for Ground floor slab .............................................................. 107
Table 13 Field reinforcement for Ground floor slab ................................................................... 108
Table 14 Summary for depth determination ............................................................................... 116
Table 15 Partition wall loads on the slab .................................................................................... 118
Table 16 : Story shear force ........................................................................................................ 167
Table 17 External pressure coefficients, 𝑐𝑝𝑒 for each zone ...................................................... 178
Table 18 External pressure coefficients, 𝑐𝑝𝑒 for each zone ...................................................... 189
Table 19 : Center of mass for the floor system ........................................................................... 191
Table 20: Summary of column stiffness .................................................................................... 193
Table 21: Summary of beam stiffness ........................................................................................ 194
Table 22 summary of center of stiffness ..................................................................................... 199
Table 23 : Center of mass Vs center of stiffness ........................................................................ 200
Table 24 Summary of Support Reinforcement ........................................................................... 238
Table 25 Sample Column on Each Floor .................................................................................... 265
Table 26 Grouping footing based on their axial load ................................................................. 269
Table 27; Support reaction and footing category ........................................................................ 270
Table 28 Footing types to be designed ....................................................................................... 272
Table 29 Proportioning and Stress Distribution.......................................................................... 289
Table 30 Depth Determination and check depth for flexure....................................................... 289
Table 31 Reinforcement .............................................................................................................. 290

VII
Appendixes
Appendix -1- Mass Weight Calculation

Appendix-2- AutoCAD Detailing
.

VIII
Acronym
𝑅𝐶: Reinforced Concrete
𝛶: Unit weight
𝜙: Diameter of reinforcement bars
𝑓𝑦𝑘 : The characteristic strength of reinforcement steel in tension and compression
𝑓𝑦𝑑 : The design yield strength of reinforcement steel in tension and compression
𝑓𝑐𝑢 : Cubic compressive strength of concrete
𝑓𝑐𝑘 : Characteristic cylindrical compressive strength of concrete
𝑓𝑐𝑑 : Design compressive strength of concrete in compression
𝑓𝑐𝑡𝑑 : Design compressive strength of concrete in tension
𝛶𝑠 , 𝛶𝑐 : Partial safety factors for concrete and steel, respectively
𝜀𝑐𝑢 : Maximum compressive strain on the concrete
𝐸: Modulus of elasticity
HCB: Hollow concrete block
𝑑: Effective depth for the center of reinforcement bars
𝐴𝑐 : Gross area of concrete section
𝐴𝑠 : Area of tensile reinforcement bar
𝐴𝑠 ′ : Area of compressive reinforcement bar
𝜆: Slenderness ratio
𝑟: Radius of gyration
X: Neutral axis depth
I: Second moment of inertia
𝑃𝑜 : Ultimate axial load capacity of column
𝑁𝑠𝑑 : design values of internal axial load
𝑀𝑢 : Ultimate flexural capacity of the section
𝑀𝑏𝑎𝑙 : Balanced moment capacity of column
𝑀𝑜 : First order moment
𝑒𝑜 , 𝑒𝑎 , 𝑒2 : First order, accidental and second order eccentricity, respectively
𝐿𝑒𝑓𝑓 : Effective length
𝑏, ℎ: Dimensions of rectangular section (width, depth) respectively

IX
CHAPTER 1
1. INTRODUCTION
1.1. General
The first thing required to do in all structural design is to insure that the structure will perform
satisfactorily during its design life. Specifically, the design must check that the structure is
capable of carrying the loads safely and that it will not deform excessively due to the applied
loads. Building structures are composed of architectural and structural parts. The structural part
of the building supports the body of the building preventing it from any collapse or failure.
Therefore, structural design involves the determination of the different sections of the skeletal
part of the building to make it stable and sustainable throughout its design life.
A structural design is executed in such a way that the building will remain fit with
appropriate degrees of reliability and in an economic way. During design the designer must
make an assessment of the future likely level of loading, including self -weight, to which the
structure may be subjected during its design life. At the end the building should sustain all
the actions and influences during execution and use. Therefore, structural design focuses on
structural safety and serviceability with due durability. It must also optimize the cost
expended in building the structure and maintenance.
Building structures are solids, which are composed of architectural and structural parts. The
structural part of the building supports the body of the building preventing it from any collapse
or failure. Therefore, structural design involves the determination of the different sections of the
skeletal part of the building to make it stable and sustainable throughout its design life.
A structural design is executed in such a way that the building will remain fit with appropriate
degrees of reliability and in an economic way. It should sustain all the actions and influences
during execution and use. Therefore, structural design focuses on structural safety and
serviceability with due durability. It must also optimize the cost expended in building the
structure and maintenance.
This structural design is executed based on the Ethiopian Building Code of Practice (EBCS)
prepared in 1995 E.C And EBCS - EN. This code follows the Limit State design approach. Limit

1
state is a state beyond which the structure no longer satisfies the design performance
requirements. It consists of two states namely Ultimate Limit and serviceability Limit states.
Ultimate Limit states are conditions related with collapse or states prior to structural failure. Its
main concern is the safety of structure and people. Serviceability Limit states are those
associated to conditions beyond which a structure does not accomplish specified service
requirements. It is mainly concerned about the function of construction works, comfort of
people, and appearance.
The prime objective of design is structural safety and serviceability. In case the structure fails,
it must be in such a way it will minimize risks and casualty. It must extend the time for
evacuation of people inside a building. This requirement of structural design is accomplished by
the principle called ductility. Ductility allows yielding of steel reinforcement prior to the collapse
of the building. Yielding of steel bars warns the start of failure of a structure or its part.
Therefore, structures are designed to be under reinforced by certain percent to assure ductility
mode of failure if it happens.
1.2. Objectives
1.2.1. General Objectives
 To experience the comprehensive design requirements and apply the engineering

knowledge
 To select and apply the applicable method of design and analysis, software and tools
 To account for other design consideration such as cost, construction environment,

aesthetic and social impacts.

2
1.2.2. Specific objective
Therefore, design of a building generally involves the design of the following elements of the
building according to their design steps
 Design of roof
 Design of floor slabs

 Design of stair
 Design of beams and columns
 Design of footing
1.3. Design data and assumptions
Concrete
 The limit state design method has been adopted for the design of the components. The
Ethiopian Building code of standards, EBCS-1, EBCS-2, and EBCS-8 1995 design charts are
used.
 Class I workmanship and ordinary loading condition is used.
 Location of the building is at Adama city. Zone-4
Concrete grade C-25
 c  1.5 (Ordinary loading) [EBCS – 2, 1995 table 3.1]
f ck  0.8 * 25  20Mpa
0.8 * Fck
f cd   11.33Mpa
c
f ctk  1.5Mpa
E cm  29Gpa
f ctk 1.5
f ctd    1.0Mpa
c 1.5
[EBCS -2, 1995 table 2.4 & 2.5]

3
Reinforcement Steel
f yk  300Mpa
 s  1.15
f yk 300
f yd    260.87Mpa
s 1.15
E s  200Gpa
𝑦𝑑 𝑓
𝑚 = 0.8𝑓 =28.78
𝑐𝑑
2.5 2.5
𝐶1 = = = 0.08687
𝑚 28.78
𝐶2 = 0.32𝑚2 𝑓𝑐𝑑 = 3003.0
1.4 Design load

PD   f PK
Where: - Pk= Characteristic load
 f = Partial safety factor for loads
1.5 For live load [EBCS – 2, 1995 table 3.3]
1.35 For dead load
1.4. Design method and reference
Limit state design method is adopted in this project.
The reference (codes and aids) used are: -
 EBCS – 1, 1995
 EBCS – 2,1995
 EBCS – 7,1995
 EBCS – 8,1995

4
Chapter Two
2. Wind Load Analysis and Roof Design
2.1. Introduction
Roof may be defined as the upper most part of the buildings, provided as a structural covering, to
protect the building from external weather exposure such as rain, sun, wind, etc.
Wind is a moving air which thus possesses kinetic energy. This effect of wind on structures is
significant on light and dynamic structures. In fact has considerable effect on vertically standing
walls, columns and beams etc. thus has to be considered efficiently.
The action of wind can be suction or pressure to the structure both externally or internally.
However, these effects are more magnified for structure with more openings and large
surface areas. We have both reinforced concrete flat roofs and duo pitch roofs.
The effect of wind on structures is significant on light and dynamic structures. It has
considerable effect on vertically standing walls, columns, beams, roof material etc.
However since the effect of wind on that element like wall, columns, beams and flat roof are
insignificant we analyze only for truss roof.
This chapter is aimed to design of building roofs to resist the wind load.
Objectives:
The following activities are included in the chapter:
o Detailed Introduction of the analysis of wind load based on EBCS-1/1995 and Eurocode-
1992
o Wind load analysis of Flat Roof
o Design of Solid Slab
o Transfer Load To beam

5
2.2. Method of Analysis
There are two methods for wind load analysis, namely, the Quasi-static method and
detailed dynamic analysis. The former is applied to structures whose structural
properties do not make them susceptible to dynamic exaltation. The latter is applied to structures
which are likely to be susceptible to dynamic excitation. The choice of the
above two methods depends on the value of the structure of their dynamic coefficient.
The quasi-static method is used for structures whose Cd value is less or equal to 1.2.
For our case the building part that has truss roof variables are; Height of building
=21.9m and Width of building = 16.55m. From figure 3.7 of EBCS-1, 1995, the value of the
dynamic coefficient of this building is Cd =0.93 that is Cd<=1.2 and height of the
building is less than 200m. This implies that the simple procedure of EBCS (quasistatic) method
of analysis the appropriate method. This is used for wind load analysis and roof design.
2.2.1. Wind load analysis for our building
 General procedures of wind load analysis
Generally, we should follow the following steps in analyzing wind loads
 Determine site design wind speed and basic velocity pressure

 Identify the roof type
 Determine wind pressure coefficients namely external wind pressure coefficient and
internal wind pressure coefficients
 Determine net wind pressure coefficient
 Determine the design or net wind pressure
 Determine the wind force

6
 Design information
The building is located in Adama town. Therefore, according to EBCS-1, 1995 the area is
categorized according to the following:
Terrain Category:-According to Table 3.2 of EBCS-1, 1995, Page 58.
Table 1.Terrain Category and related parameters
Category Terrain KT z0 (m) zmin (m)
Lakes with at least 5km fetch upwind and smooth flat

I 0.17 0.01 2
country without obstacles
Farmland with boundary hedges, occasional small farm
II 0.19 0.05 4
structure, houses or trees
III Suburban or industrial areas and permanent Forests 0.22 0.3 8
Urban areas in which at least 15% of the surface is covered

IV 0.24 1 16
with buildings and their average height exceeds 15m
Note:-
When there is any doubt about the choice between two categories in the definition of a given
area, the worst case should be taken.
Base on the above table our site fall under Terrain Category - IV by considering the worst case.
This Category is characterized with
o Terrain factor, 𝐊 𝐓 = 𝟎. 𝟐𝟒,

o Roughness length, 𝐳𝟎 = 𝟏 𝐦,
o Minimum height, 𝐳𝐦𝐢𝐧 = 𝟏𝟔 𝐦

7
Topography coefficient, 𝐜𝐭 (𝐳) :
Accounts for the increase of mean wind speed over isolated hills and escarpments (not
undulating and mountainous regions). It is related to the wind velocity at the base of the hill or
escarpment, it shall be considered for locations within the topography affected zone.
It is defined by:
Ct = 1 for 𝚽 < 𝟎. 𝟎𝟓
Ct = 1 + 2s 𝚽 for 0.05 < 𝚽 < 𝟎. 𝟑𝟎
Ct = 1 + 0.6 s 𝚽 for 0.05 < 𝚽 < 𝟎. 𝟑𝟎
Where:
S is the factor to be obtained by interpolation from the value of 𝑆 = 1 at the crest of a hill, ridge
or escarpment and the value 𝑆 = 0 at boundary of the topography affected zone. Interpolation
shall be linear with horizontal distance from crest and with height above the local ground level.
𝛷 is the upwind slope in the wind direction
H
Φ=
Lu
𝐋𝐮 is the actual length of the upwind slope in the wind direction
𝐋𝐝 is the actual length of the downwind slope in the wind direction
𝐇 is the effective height of the feature
𝐱 is the horizontal distance of the site from the top of the crest
𝐙 is the vertical distance from the ground level of the site
Lu , shallow slope (0.05 < Φ < 0.3)

Le = { H
, steep slope (Φ > 0.3)
3
There for in our case No escarpment or hills are located around the building site which means the
site is topography unaffected zone and therefore, ct (z) = 1 as we described above or according
to section 3.8.4 of EBCS-1, 1995,, page 58-60.
 Height of the building is 21.90 m
 Width of the building is 16.55 m
 Dynamic coefficient,Cd : According to Figure 3.7 of EBCS-1, 1995, Figure 3.7. Dynamic
coefficient is approximately 0.95. Therefore we can apply static method of analysis of
wind load.

8
Roughness coefficient:- Cr (z) : takes into account the variation of mean wind velocity at the
site of the structure due to:
 The height above ground level,
 The roughness of the terrain depending on the wind direction.
𝐊 𝐓 𝐥𝐧 (𝐳⁄𝐳𝟎 ) 𝐅𝐨𝐫 𝐳𝐦𝐢𝐧 ≤ 𝐳 ≤ 𝟐𝟎𝟎𝐦
𝐜𝐫 (𝐳) = {
𝐜𝐫 (𝐳𝐦𝐢𝐧 ) 𝐅𝐨𝐫 𝐳 ≤ 𝐳𝐦𝐢𝐧
Where:
Z = height of the building at the roof level
In our case Z = 21.90 m , z0 = 1.00 m and zmin = 16.00m.
i.e. zmin ≤ z ≤ 200m and
𝒄𝒓 (𝒛) = 𝑲𝑻 𝒍𝒏 (𝒛⁄𝒛𝟎 )
21.90
𝑐𝑟 (𝑧) = 0.24 ln = 0.74
1.00
Exposure coefficient, 𝐂𝐞 (𝐳):

Wind velocity tends to decrease near to ground level owing to frictional forces between the
grounds. If the terrain is rough, the decrease in velocity can be substantial. The exposure
coefficient takes into account of the variation from the reference wind velocity due to terrain
roughness, topography and height above ground on the mean wind speed and turbulence.
𝟕𝐤 𝐓
𝐜𝐞 (𝐳) = 𝐜𝐫𝟐 (𝐳)𝐜𝐭𝟐 (𝐳) [𝟏 + ]
𝐜𝐫 (𝐳)𝐜𝐭 (𝐳)
𝑪𝒓 (𝒛) = 𝟎. 𝟕𝟑𝟓 , 𝒄𝒕 (𝒛) = 1, 𝒌𝑻 = 0.24
7 ∗ 0.24
𝑐𝑒 (𝑧) = 𝑐𝑒 (21.90) = 0.742 ∗ 12 [1 + ] = 1.79
0.74 ∗ 1
Where:-
𝒄𝒆 (𝒛): is the exposure coefficient
𝒄𝒓 (𝒛) : is the roughness coefficient
𝒄𝒕 (𝒛): is the topographic coefficient
𝒌𝑻 : is the terrain factor

9
2.2.2. Determination of wind pressure
i. External wind pressure:
𝑊𝑒 = 𝑞𝑟𝑒𝑓 𝑐𝑒 (𝑧𝑒 )𝑐𝑝𝑒
𝒒𝒓𝒆𝒇 = Reference mean wind pressure

𝒄𝒆 (𝒛)= Exposure coefficient that takes into account the influence of terrain roughness
𝒄𝒑𝒆 = External wind pressure coefficient
1
But, q ref = 2 ρVref 2
Where:-
Vref is the reference wind velocity.
ρ is the air density.
Air density (𝛒)
The air density is affected by altitude and depends on the temperature and pressure to be
expected in the region during wind storms.
A temperature of 20°C has been selected as appropriate for Ethiopia and the variation of mean
atmospheric pressure with altitude is given in Table below.
When we come to in our case the building is located at Adama town at an altitude of 1712 m
above sea level. For this area the reference wind velocity is to be taken as 22 m/s (EBCS 1, 1995,
article 3.7.1, Table 3.1, Page55, as shown below).
Table 2 the Value of Air Density
Site Altitude(m)
0 500 1000 1500 2000
above sea level
ρ(kg/m3) 1.20 1.12 1.06 1.00 0.94
Air density at an altitude of 1712 m above sea level is 0.975 (since the elevation of Adama town
is 1712 but we interpolate and take as 2000m And 1500m above sea level by consider the worst
effect ) EBCS-1 1995 table 3.1 page 55.

10
Reference Wind Velocity
The reference wind velocity Vref is the 10 minute mean wind velocity at 10m above ground of
terrain category IV (see Table 3.2 of EBCS-1/1995) having an annual probability of exceeding of
0.02 (commonly referred to as having a mean return period of 50 years).
𝑽𝒓𝒆𝒇 = 𝑪𝑫𝑰𝑹 𝑪𝑻𝑬𝑴 𝑪𝑨𝑳𝑻 𝑽𝒓𝒆𝒇,𝟎
Where :-
𝑉𝑟𝑒𝑓,0 is the basic value of the reference wind velocity to be taken as 22 m/s.
𝐶𝐷𝐼𝑅 is the direction factor to be taken as 1.0
𝐶𝑇𝐸𝑀 is the temporary (seasonal) factor to be taken as 1.0
𝐶𝐴𝐿𝑇 is the altitude factor to be taken as 1.0
Therefor:-
𝑉𝑟𝑒𝑓 = 1.0 ∗ 1.0 ∗ 1.0 ∗ 22 m/s
𝑽𝒓𝒆𝒇 = 𝟐𝟐 m/s
1 1
Now, q ref = 2 ρVref 2 = 2 ∗ 0.94 ∗ 222 = 227.48 N/m2 = 0.227 KN/m2
The external wind pressure 𝑊𝑒 will be

We = qref ce (ze )cpe
q ref = 0.227, ce (ze ) = ce (21.90) = 1.79
𝑊𝑒 = 0.227 ∗ 1.79 ∗ 𝑐𝑝𝑒
𝑾𝒆 = 𝟎. 𝟒𝟎𝟔𝒄𝒑𝒆 (𝐊𝐍/𝐦²)
ii. Internal wind pressure:

𝑊𝑖 = 𝑞𝑟𝑒𝑓 𝑥𝑐𝑒 (𝑧𝑖 )𝑐𝑝𝑖
Where:-
𝑐𝑒 (𝑧𝑖)= Exposure coefficient that takes into account the influence of terrain roughness
𝑐𝑝𝑖 = Internal wind pressure coefficient from Appendix A of EBCS-1/1995.

11
𝑊𝑖 = 0.227 ∗ 1.79 ∗ 𝑐𝑝𝑖
q ref = 0.227, ce (ze ) = ce (21.40) = 1.775
𝑾𝒊 = 𝟎. 𝟒𝟎𝟔𝒄𝒑𝒊 (𝐊𝐍/𝐦²)
Wind pressure Coefficients
 External wind pressure coefficient: External pressure coefficients give the effect of
the wind on the external surfaces of buildings.
 Internal wind pressure Coefficient: internal pressure coefficients give the effect of the
wind on the internal surfaces of buildings.
External Pressure coefficients

The external pressure coefficients are divided into local coefficients and overall coefficients.
 Local coefficients,cpe,1 give the pressure coefficients for loaded areas of 1m2. They
may be used for the design of small elements and fixings.
 Overall coefficients,cpe,10 give the pressure coefficients for loaded areas of 10 m2.
They may be used for loaded areas larger than 10 m2.
The external pressure coefficients cpe for buildings and parts of buildings depend on the size of
the loaded area A, which is the area of the structure that produces the wind action in the section
to be calculated.
Note:- The loaded area is the area of the structure, which produces the wind action in the section
to be calculated.
For buildings with the loaded area between 1𝑚2 and 10𝑚2 the following procedure is
recommended for determining the external pressure coefficient 𝑐𝑝𝑒 .
A ≤ 1m2 , cpe = cpe,1
1m2 ≤ A ≤ 10m2 , cpe = cpe,1 + (cpe,10 − cpe,1 ) log10 A
A ≥ 10m2 , cpe = cpe,10
The values of cpe,1 and cpe,10 are given on Tables A.1 to A.5 of EBCS-1/1995 for orthogonal
wind directions 0°, 90°,180° but represent highest values obtained in a range of wind direction
Ɵ = ± 45° either side of the relevant orthogonal direction. These values are only applicable to
buildings.

12
Internal Pressure coefficients
Net Pressure: The net wind pressure across a wall or an element is the difference of the
pressures on each surface taking due account of their signs. (Pressure, directed towards the
surface is taken as positive, and suction, directed away from the surface as negative).
Determination of pressure coefficients, 𝒄𝒑𝒆 and 𝒄𝒑𝒊 for flat roof type
Figure 1 Key for Flat Roofs
b= width of the building = 16.55 m

h = height of the building at the roof level = 21.9 m
 e = min (b, 2h) = min (16.55, 2*21.9) e = 16.55 m From EBCS-1, 1995 Figure A-6
e/10 = 1.655, e/4 = 4.13 e/2 = 8.275
Determining the area of each zones
 Area of zone F = 1.655*4.13 = 6.83 m² : 1m2 ≤ A ≤ 10m2

 Area of zone G = 1.655 * (16.55-(2*4.13)) = 13.71 m² ∶ A > 10m²
 Area of zone H = 6.62*16.55 = 109.56 m² ∶ A > 10m²
 Area of zone I = 6.62*16.55 = 109.56 m²∶ A > 10m²
 Area of zone J = 1.655*16.55= 27.39 m²∶ A > 10m²

13
Determining the 𝐜𝐩𝐞 value
External pressure coefficients
For Zone F
Determine cpe values using the formula.
cpe = cpe,1 + (cpe,10 − cpe,1 ) log10 𝐀
 Using interpolation determine the value of Cpe, 1 and Cpe, 10 from Table A-4
Then the cpe value will be:

Zone F
cpe = cpe,1 + (cpe,10 − cpe,1 ) log10 𝐀 -1.91
For Zone G, H,I,

cpe = cpe,10
Zone Cpe
G -1.2
H -0.7
I -0.2

14
Internal Pressure
Internal wind pressure is the wind pressure acting on the internal surface of a structure and is
given by:
Internal wind pressure coefficients, 𝑐𝑝𝑖
i. Close the openings at the lee ward and parallel side (Internal pressure).
So, 𝛍 = 𝟎, 𝐜𝐩𝐢=+𝟎.𝟖
Net wind pressure

𝑤𝑛𝑒𝑡 = 𝑤𝑒 − 𝑤𝑖 = 𝑞𝑟𝑒𝑓 𝑥𝑐𝑒 (𝑧) ( 𝑐𝑝𝑒 − 𝑐𝑝𝑖 )
𝑤𝑛𝑒𝑡 = 𝟎. 𝟒𝟎𝟔(𝑐𝑝𝑒 − 𝑐𝑝𝑖 )
Zone F G H I
Cpe -1.91 -1.2 -0.7 -0.2
Cpi +0.8 +0.8 +0.8 +0.8
(𝑐𝑝𝑒 − 𝑐𝑝𝑖 ) -2.71 -2 -1.5 -1

-
`𝑤𝑛𝑒𝑡 (𝐊𝐍/𝐦²)
1.10026 -0.812 -0.609 -0.406
ii. Close all the openings at the wind ward direction (Internal suction)
So, 𝛍 = 𝟏, cpi=−0.5
Zone F G H I
Cpe -1.91 -1.2 -0.7 +0.2
Cpi -0.5 -0.5 -0.5 -0.5
(𝑐𝑝𝑒 − 𝑐𝑝𝑖 ) -1.41 -0.7 -0.2 0.7

-
`𝑤𝑛𝑒𝑡 (𝐊𝐍/𝐦²)
0.57246 -0.2842 -0.0812 0.2842

15
The maximum values from the above two cases are:
 𝐰𝐧𝐞𝐭 = −𝟏. 𝟏 𝐊𝐍⁄𝐦𝟐 𝐟𝐨𝐫 𝐬𝐮𝐜𝐭𝐢𝐨𝐧
 𝐰𝐧𝐞𝐭 = +𝟎. 𝟐𝟖 𝐊𝐍⁄𝐦𝟐 𝐟𝐨𝐫 𝐩𝐫𝐞𝐬𝐬𝐮𝐫𝐞

2.3. Slab roof Design
For the design purpose we take the max positive pressure. The suction pressure can be
easily counter balanced by the weight of the slab.
Net positive wind pressure = 0.28 KN/m2
Stair
Figure 2 Flat sold slab roof

16
2.3.1. Geometry/minimum depth determination
Most of the time serviceability limit state governs for slab design and we take the depth from
serviceability limit state as an initial depth and check that depth for shear and flexure.
f
yk L
d ≥ (0.4 + 0.6 400 ) βe , leff = effective length
a
βa = constant which is based on support condition . from EBCS − 2/1995

 0.6 * 300  Le 𝐿𝑒
d   0.4   𝑑 = 0.85 ∗
 400   a 𝛽𝑎
For the Slab
Panel P1
4.8 4.7
P1 2.37
2.4 P1
2.4 2.37
4.57
4.7
Equivalent rectangular area using Bales theorem
𝟐 𝒂
𝒂𝒓 = ((𝟐𝒄 + 𝒂) ∗ )
𝟑 (𝒂 + 𝒄)
𝒂(𝒂−𝒄)
𝒃𝒓 = 𝒃 −
𝒃(𝒂+𝒄)
𝟐 𝟒. 𝟖
𝒂𝒓 = ((𝟐 ∗ 𝟒. 𝟓𝟕 + 𝟒. 𝟖) ∗ ) = 𝟒. 𝟕
𝟑 𝟒. 𝟖 + 𝟒. 𝟓𝟕
𝟒. 𝟖(𝟒. 𝟖 − 𝟒. 𝟓𝟕)
𝒃𝒓 = 𝟐. 𝟒 − = 𝟐. 𝟑𝟕
𝟓(𝟒. 𝟖 + 𝟒. 𝟓𝟕)

17
𝐿𝑦 4.7
= 2.37 = 1.9 < 2 𝑇𝑤𝑜 𝑤𝑎𝑦 𝑠𝑙𝑎𝑏 Le = length of the shorter span = 2370mm
𝐿𝑋
Then the βa Value will be based on EBCS- 2, 1995, Table 5.1, page 54
1 = 40
1.9 = βa After interpolation βa = 37
2 = 30
𝐿𝑒 2370
𝑑 = 0.85 ∗ = 0.85 ∗ = 𝟔𝟒. 𝟎𝟓 𝐦𝐦
𝐵𝑎 37
Panel P2
2.8
2.4
𝐿𝑦 2.8
= 2.4 = 1.16 < 2 Two way slab Le = 2400
𝐿𝑋
By interpolation βa=38.4
𝐿𝑒 2400
𝑑 = 0.85 ∗ = 0.85 ∗ = 𝟓𝟑. 𝟏𝟐𝟓 𝐦𝐦
𝐵𝑎 38.4

18
Panel P3
3.47
2.41
𝐿𝑦 3.47
= = 1.44 < 2 Two way slab Le = 2400
𝐿𝑋 2.4
1 = 40
1.44 = βa After interpolation βa = 35.6
2 = 30
𝐿𝑒 2400
𝑑 = 0.85 ∗ = 0.85 ∗ = 𝟓𝟕. 𝟑 𝒎𝒎
𝐵𝑎 35.6
Panel P4
3.47
2.41
𝐿𝑦 3.47
= 2.41 = 1.43 < 2 Two way slab Le = 2410
𝐿𝑋
1 = 40
1.43 = βa After interpolation βa=35.7
2 = 30
𝐿𝑒 2410
𝑑 = 0.85 ∗ = 0.85 ∗ = 𝟓𝟕. 𝟑𝟖 𝒎𝒎
𝐵𝑎 35.7

19
Panel P5(Interior)
2.8
2.6
𝐿𝑦 2.8
= 2.6 = 1.07 < 2 Two way slab Le = 2600
𝐿𝑋
1 = 45
2 = 35
𝐿𝑒 2600
𝑑 = 0.85 ∗ = 0.85 ∗ = 𝟒𝟗. 𝟖𝟖 𝒎𝒎
𝐵𝑎 44.3
Panel P6 (Interior)
3.47
2.6
𝐿𝑦 3.47
= = 1.33 < 2 Two way slab Le = 2600
𝐿𝑋 2.6
1 = 45
2 = 35
𝐿 2600
𝑑 = 0.85 ∗ 𝐵𝑒 = 0.85 ∗ = 𝟓𝟐. 𝟗𝟗 𝒎𝒎
𝑎 41.7

20
Panel P7
3.47
2.6
𝐿𝑦 3.47
= = 1.33 < 2 Two way slab Le = 2600
𝐿𝑋 2.6
1 = 40
2 = 30
𝐿𝑒 2600
𝑑 = 0.85 ∗ = 0.85 ∗ = 𝟔𝟎. 𝟐𝟏 𝒎𝒎
𝐵𝑎 36.7
Panel P8
4.34 4.3
2.2
2.24
2.24 2.2
4.3
4.15

𝟐 𝒂
𝒂𝒓 = ((𝟐𝒄 + 𝒂) ∗ )
𝟑 (𝒂 + 𝒄)
𝒂(𝒂−𝒄)
𝒃𝒓 = 𝒃 −
𝒃(𝒂+𝒄)
𝟐 𝟒. 𝟑𝟒
𝒂𝒓 = ((𝟐 ∗ 𝟒. 𝟏𝟓 + 𝟒. 𝟑𝟒) ∗ ) = 𝟒. 𝟑
𝟑 𝟒. 𝟑𝟒 + 𝟒. 𝟏𝟓
𝟒. 𝟑𝟒(𝟒. 𝟑𝟒 − 𝟒. 𝟏𝟓)
𝒃𝒓 = 𝟐. 𝟐𝟒 − = 𝟐. 𝟐
𝟐. 𝟐𝟒(𝟒. 𝟑𝟒 + 𝟒. 𝟏𝟓)

21
𝐿𝑦 4.3
𝐿𝑋
1 = 40
2 = 30
𝐿𝑒 2200
𝑑 = 0.85 ∗ = 0.85 ∗ = 𝟔𝟏. 𝟑𝟏 𝐦𝐦
𝐵𝑎 30.5
Panel P9
2.8
2.24
𝐿𝑦 2.8
= 2.24 = 1.25 < 2 Two way slab Le = 2240
𝐿𝑋
By interpolation
1 = 40
2 = 30
𝐿𝑒 2200
𝑑 = 0.85 ∗ = 0.85 ∗ = 𝟒𝟔. 𝟗𝟑 𝐦𝐦
𝐵𝑎 37.5

22
Panel P10
3.47
2.24
𝐿𝑦 3.47
= 2.24 = 1.54 < 2 Two way slab Le = 2240
𝐿𝑋
By interpolation
1 = 40
2 = 30
𝐿𝑒 2240
𝑑 = 0.85 ∗ = 0.85 ∗ = 𝟓𝟏. 𝟕𝟗 𝐦𝐦
𝐵𝑎 34.6
Panel P11
3.47
2.24
𝐿𝑦 3.47
= 2.41 = 1.54 < 2 Two way slab Le = 2240
𝐿𝑋
1 = 40
2 = 30
𝐿𝑒 2240
𝑑 = 0.85 ∗ = 0.85 ∗ = 𝟓𝟏. 𝟕𝟗 𝒎𝒎
𝐵𝑎 34.6

23
Summary
Table 3 Summary for depth determination
Support Ly Lx Ly/Lx Ba Depth d

Panel Id Type
Condition (mm) (mm) (mm) Gover
ning
P1 End span 4.7 2.37 1.9 Two - way 37 64.05
P2 End span 2.8 2.4 1.16 Two - way 38.4 53.125
P3 End span 3.47 2.4 1.44 Two - way 35.6 57.3
P4 End span 3.47 2.41 1.43 Two - way 35.7 57.38
P5 Interior span 2.8 2.6 1.07 Two - way 44.3 49.88
P6 Interior span 3.47 2.6 1.33 Two - way 41.7 52.99 64.05
P7 End span 3.47 2.6 1.33 Two - way 36.7 60.21
P8 End span 4.3 2.2 1.95 Two - way 30.5 61.31
P9 End span 2.8 2.24 1.25 Two - way 37.5 46.93
P10 End span 3.47 2.24 1.54 Two - way 34.6 51.79
P11 End span 3.47 2.24 1.54 Two - way 34.6 51.79

24
Determination of gross Depth, D:
Assumptions:
 Concrete cover = 15mm
 Main Bar = Φ12
For Slab
d= 64.05 mm
D= 64.05 + ф/2 + cover
D= 64.05 + 12 /2 + 15 = 85.05 mm
Take D Used = 90 mm
Effective depth for normal slab:
dused = D − ф − cover
dused = 90mm − 12/2mm − 15mm = 69 mm
Loading
1. Dead load
 Self-weight of slab = 24* 0.69= 3.6 KN/m2
2. Wind Load
 Net positive wind pressure = 0.28 KN
3. Live Load = 0.5KN/m2
Pd=1.35DL+ 1.5LL + 0.8WL
𝑷𝒅 = 𝟏. 𝟑𝟓 ∗ 𝟑. 𝟔 + 𝟏. 𝟓 ∗ 𝟎. 𝟓 + 𝟎. 𝟖 ∗ 𝟎. 𝟐𝟖
𝑷𝒅 = 𝟓. 𝟖𝟑KN/m2

25
2.3.2. Analysis of individual panel

Mi=α*ρd*Lx2
Panel Type Lx LY Ly/Lx Pd α*Xs α*Xf α*Ys α*Yf Mxs Mxf Mys Myf
P-1 T-4 2.37 4.7 1.9 𝟓. 𝟖𝟑 0.091 0.068 0.047 0.036 2.979 2.226 1.539 1.178
P-2 T-3 2.4 2.8 1.16 𝟓. 𝟖𝟑 0.053 0.04 0.039 0.03 1.779 1.343 1.309 1.007
P-3 T-3 2.4 3.47 1.44 𝟓. 𝟖𝟑 0.07 0.053 0.039 0.03 2.350 1.779 1.309 1.007
P-4 T-4 2.41 3.47 1.43 𝟓. 𝟖𝟑 0.075 0.056 0.047 0.036 2.539 1.896 1.591 1.219
P-5 T-1 2.6 2.8 1.07 𝟓. 𝟖𝟑 0.036 0.027 0.032 0.024 1.418 1.064 1.261 0.945
P-6 T-1 2.6 3.47 1.33 𝟓. 𝟖𝟑 0.047 0.036 0.032 0.024 1.852 1.418 1.261 0.945
P-7 T-4 2.6 3.47 1.33 𝟓. 𝟖𝟑 0.071 0.052 0.047 0.036 2.798 2.049 1.852 1.418
P-8 T-4 2.2 4.3 1.95 𝟓. 𝟖𝟑 0.093 0.069 0.047 0.036 2.624 1.946 1.326 1.015
P-9 T-3 2.24 2.8 1.25 𝟓. 𝟖𝟑 0.059 0.044 0.039 0.03 1.725 1.287 1.140 0.877
P-10 T-3 2.24 3.47 1.54 𝟓. 𝟖𝟑 0.074 0.056 0.039 0.03 2.164 1.638 1.140 0.877
P-11 T-4 2.41 3.47 1.43 𝟓. 𝟖𝟑 0.075 0.056 0.047 0.036 2.539 1.896 1.591 1.219
o Mxs=α*Xs*Pd*Lx2
o Mys=α*Ys*Pd*Lx2
o Mxf=α*Xf*Pd*Lx2
o Mys=α*Yf*Pd*Lx2
Expression that the shorter span has been deformed from the action on the longer span

26
A. Moment adjustments
There are two alternatives
 When ΔMs/Ms larger *100 ≤ 20%, in this case the average of the two values will be used
for the design
 When ΔMs/Ms larger *100 ≥ 20%, consider moment distribution

27
Moment Adjustment (at support moment)

1. For panel P-1
Between P-1 and P-2
o Δm= 1.539 – 1.309= 0.281
o Δm/M larger = 0.281/1.539*100= 18.2% < 20%; no need for adjustment take the average
o (1.309 + 1.539)/2= 1.425
o For panel P-2
Between P-2 and P-3
 No need take 1.309
Between P2 and P5
o Δm= 1.779-1.418 = 0.361
o Δm/M larger= 0.36/1.779 *100 = 20.2 >20%; we need moment adjustment
o Dfs1=1/Lx2/(1/Lx2+1/Lx5) =1/2.81/(1/2.81+1/3.01) = 0.68
o Dfs2=1-0.68 = 0.32
o For P-1, MX2= 1.779 -(0.361 * 0.68) = 1.53
o Mx5= 1.418 + (0.361 * 0.32) = 1.53
2. For panel P-3
Between P-3 and P-4
o Δm= 1.591 – 1.309 = 0.282

o Δm/M larger= 0.282/1.591*100 = 17.7% < 20%; no need for adjustment take the average
1.591+1.309
o ( ) = 𝟏. 𝟒𝟓
2
Between P-3 and P-6

o Δm = 2.35 – 1.852 = 0.498
o Δm/M larger= 0.498/2.35 * 100 = 21.1% >20%; we need moment adjustment
o Dfs1=1/Lx2/(1/Lx2+1/Lx5) =1/2.81/(1/2.81+1/3.01) = 0.68
o Dfs2=1-0.68 = 0.32
o For P-1, MX2= 2.35 -(0.498 * 0.68) = 2.01
o Mx5= 1.852 + (0.498 * 0.32) = 2.01

28
o For panel P-4
Between P-4 and P-7
o Δm = 2.798 - 2.539 = 0.259

o Δm/M larger = 0.259/2.798*100 = 9.25 < 20%; no need for adjustment take the average
2.798+2.59
o ( ) = 𝟐. 𝟔𝟗𝟒
2
3. For panel P-5
Between P-5 and P-6
We Take = 1.261
Between P-5 and P-9
o Δm= 1.725 - 1.418 = 0.307
o Δm/M larger= 0.307/1.725*(100) = 17.79% < 20; no need for adjustment take the
average
1.725+1.418
o ( ) = 𝟏. 𝟓𝟕
2
4. For panel P-6
Between P-6 and P-7
o Δm = 1.852 – 1.261 = 0.591

o Δm/M larger=0.591/1.852*100 = 31.9% > 20%; it needs adjustment
o Dfs5=1/Lx6/ (1/Lx6+1/Lx7) =1/3.01/ (1/3.01+1/3.01) = 0.5
o Dfs6= 1- 0.5 = 0.5
o For P-6; Mxs= 1.852 - (0.591 * 0.5) = 1.55
o P-7; Mxs= 1.261 + (0.591 * 0.5) = 1.55
Between P6 and P10
o Δm = 2.164 – 1.852 = 0.312
o Δm/M larger= 0.312/2.164*100 = 14.4% > 20%; no need for adjustment take the average
2.164+1.852
o ( ) = 𝟐. 𝟎𝟎𝟖
2

29
5. For panel P-7
Between P-7 and P-11
o Δm= 2.798 – 2.539 = 0.259

o Δm/M larger = 0.259/2.798*100 = 9 > no need for adjustment take the average
2.798+2.539
o ( ) = 𝟐. 𝟔𝟔𝟖
2
6. For panel P-8
Between P-8 and P-9
2. Δm= 1.326 – 1.14 = 0.186

o Δm/M larger= 0.186 /1.326*100 = 14.02 < 20% no need for adjustment take the average
1.326+1.14
o ( ) = 𝟏. 𝟐𝟑𝟑
2
For panel P-9

No need Take 1.14

30
7. For panel P-10

o Δm= 1.591 -1.14 = 0.451
o Δm/M larger = 0.451/1.591*100 = 28.3 > 20% it needs adjustment
o Dfs10 =1/Lx10/ (1/Lx10+1/Lx11) =1/2.64/ (1/2.64+1/2.64) = 0.5
o Dfs11 = 1- 0.5 = 0.5
o For P-10; Mxs= 1.591 - (0.451 * 0.5) = 1.36
o P-11; Mxs = 1.14 +(0.451 * 0.5) = 1.36
Moment Adjustment (At span)
A. For Span P-1
For P1 and P2
Adjusted support moment
Md = 1.425 KNm
Mxd = Mxf + Cx * Δm
Myd = Myf + Cy * Δm
Δm = 1.539 – 1.425 = 0.114KNm
Determine Cx And Cy from Ebcs 2 Table – A2
𝐿𝑦 4.7
= = 1.9 Cx = 0.258, Cy = 0.06
𝐿𝑥 2.37
Mxd = 2.226 + (0.114 * 0.94)

= 2.33 KNm
Myd = 1.343 + (0.114 * 0.94)
= 1.45 KNm

31
B. For P-2
We need to consider two Positions
And We need to do span adjustment for two positions.
So we don’t need to do For Both P2 & P1 And P2&P3
Only we adjust for this P2 & P5
 For P2 & P5
Md = 1.53KNm
Δm = 1.779 – 1.53 = 0.249KNm
𝐿𝑦 2.8
= = 1.16 Cx = 0.332, Cy = 0.368
𝐿𝑥 2.4
Mxd = 2.226 + (0.249 * 0.6)

= 2.37KNm
Myd = 1.064 + (0.249 * 0.6)
= 1.21KNm

32
C. For P-3
So we need to do for Both P3 & P2 And P3 & P6
 For P3 & P2
Md = 1.53KNm
Δm1 = 1.53 – 1.309 = 0.221KNm
𝐿𝑥 3.87
= = 1.44 Cx1 = 0.311 , Cy1 = 0.104
𝐿𝑦 2.81
 For P3 & P6
Md = 2.01KNm
Δm2 =2.35 - 2.01 = 0.34KNm
Determine Cx And Cy
Cx2 = 0.407
Cy2 = 0.323
So:-
Myd = Myf + Cy1 * Δm1 + Cy2 * Δm2
Mxd = Mxf + Cx1 * Δm1 + Cx2 * Δm2
Mxd = 1.779 + 0.311 * 0.221 + 0.407 * 0.34
Mxd = 1.98 KNm
Myd = 1.007+ 0.104 * 0.221 +0.323 * 0.34
Myd = 1.13 KNm

33
D. For P-4
 For P4 & P3
Md = 1.45KNm
Δm = 1.51 –1.45 = 0.21KNm
𝐿𝑥 3.87
= = 1.44 Cx= 0.31 , Cy = 0.104
𝐿𝑦 2.81
Mxd = 1.896 + (0.311 * 0.21)

= 1.78KNm
Myd = 1.219 + (0.104 * 0.21)
= 1.54KNm
E. For P-5
No need for Span Adjustment
F. For P-6
 For P6 & P10

34
G. For P-7
So we need to do for Both P7 & P4, P7 & P6 And P7&P11

 For P7 & P4
Md = 2.964KNm
Δm1 = 2.964 – 2.798 = 0.22KNm
𝐿𝑦 3.87
= = 1.37 Cx1 = 0.49, Cy1 = 0.337
𝐿𝑥 2.81
 For P7 & P6
Md = 1.55KNm
Δm2 = 1.55 – 1.4 = 0.15KNm
Determine Cx And Cy
Cx2 = 0.318
Cy2 = 0.11
 For P7 & P11

Md = 2.668 KNm
Δm3 = 2.798 - 2.668 = 0.13KNm
Determine Cx And Cy
Cx3 = 0.49
Cy3 = 0.337
Myd = Myf + Cy1 * Δm1 + Cy2 * Δm2+Cy3* Δm3
Mxd = Mxf + Cx1 * Δm1 + Cx2 * Δm2+ Cx3* Δm3
Mxd = 2.049 + 0.49 * 0.22 + 0.318 * 0.15+0.49*0.13

Mxd = 2.13 KNm
Myd = 1.418+ 0.337 * 0.22 + 0.11 * 0.15 + 0.337*0.13
Myd = 1.632 KNm

35
H. For P-8
I. For P9
For P9 & P5
Md = 1.57KNm
Δm1 = 1.725 – 1.57 = 0.155KNm
𝐿𝑦 3.2
= = 1.2 Cx1 = 0.344 , Cy1 = 0.364
𝐿𝑥 2.64
Mxd = 1.287 + 0.344 * 0.155
Mxd = 1.345 KNm
Myd = 0.877 + 0.364 * 0.155
Myd = 1.51KNm
J. For P10
No need for span Adjustment
K. For P-11
 For P11 & P10
Md = 1.36KNm
Δm = 1.591 – 1.36 = 0.24KNm
𝐿𝑦 3.87
= = 1.43 Cx = 0.312 , Cy = 0.105
𝐿𝑥 2.64
Mxd = 1.896 + (0.312 * 0.24)

= 1.97KNm
Myd = 1.219 + (0.105 * 0.24)
= 1.24KNm

36
2.3.3. Check depth for flexure (Ultimate limit state)
Depth requirement for ultimate flexural strength of concrete compression stress capacity
Mmax
d=√
0.8 b fyd ρm (1 − 0.4 ρm)
Where:
 M max = Mu = 𝟐. 𝟔𝟗𝟒 KN. m

 b = 1000mm
 fcd = 11.33 Mpa
 fyd = 260.87 Mp = 0.015
 m = 28.78
 C1 = 0.0869
 C2 = 3003.04
 𝜌𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 0.00167
 𝜌𝑚𝑎𝑥 = 0.75 𝜌𝑏 = 0.019
1 4∗𝑀
 𝜌 = 2 ∗ (𝐶1 − √𝐶1 2 − 𝑏∗𝑑2 ∗𝐶
𝑑
)
2
1 4 ∗ 2.694∗106
 𝜌 = 2 ∗ (0.0869 − √0.0869 2 − 1000∗69 2 ∗3003.04) = 0.00225
𝜌𝑚𝑖𝑛 < 𝜌 < 𝜌𝑚𝑎𝑥

0.00167 < 0.00225 < 0.019
2.694 ∗ 106
d=√
0.8 ∗ 1000 ∗ 11.33 ∗ 0.019 ∗ 28.78(1 − 0.4 ∗ 0.019 ∗ 28.78)
𝐝 = 𝟐𝟔. 𝟑𝟕 𝐦𝐦 < 𝐝𝐮𝐬𝐞𝐝 = 𝟔𝟗𝐦𝐦 ----- Nice!!

37
2.3.4. Reinforcement Works
A. Main (Flexural) reinforcement design
 b = 1000mm
 dused = 69 mm
0.5 0.5
 𝜌𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 𝑓 = 300 = 0.00167
𝑦𝑘 (𝑀𝑝𝑎)
 m=28.78
 C1 = 0.0869
 C2 = 3003.04
1 4∗𝑀
 𝜌 = 2 ∗ (𝐶1 − √𝐶1 2 − 𝑏∗𝑑2 ∗𝐶
𝑑
)
2
 𝐴𝑠 = 𝜌 ∗ 𝑏 ∗ 𝑑
According to EBCS-2/1995 minimum reinforcement in slab is:
𝐴𝑠𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 𝜌𝑚𝑖𝑛 𝑏 ∗ 𝑑
𝐴𝑠𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 0.00167 ∗ 1000 ∗ 69
𝑨𝒔𝒎𝒊𝒏 = 𝟏𝟏𝟓. 𝟐𝟑 𝒎𝒎 ²
Calculate bar spacing by selecting bar diameter
𝑏𝑎𝑠
𝑆=
𝐴𝑠
Where:
As = calculated reiforcement at suppport or span
as = area of single bar
According to EBCS-2/1995 the spacing for main bars for slabs shall not exceed the smaller of
2D or 350mm
2D
Smax ≤ { EBCS-2/1995 Section 7.2.2.2(3)
350mm
Where D = depth of slab (thickness of slab)

38
Table 4 Support reinforcement for Ground floor slab

Support Reinforcement
Slab level Md 𝝆 As As,min As,provide Ф Scal Spro AsPro

P1 - P2 1.425 0.00167 115.23 115.23 115.23 10 681.246203 350 Ø10 c/c 350
P2 - P3 1.309 0.00167 115.23 115.23 115.23 10 681.246203 350 Ø10 c/c 350
P2 – P5 1.53 0.00167 115.23 115.23 115.23 10 681.246203 350 Ø10 c/c 350
P3 – P4 1.45 0.00167 115.23 115.23 115.23 10 681.246203 350 Ø10 c/c 350
P3 – P6 2.01 0.00167 115.23 115.23 115.23 10 681.246203 350 Ø10 c/c 350
P4 – S7 2.694 0.002225 153.525 115.23 153.525 10 511.317375 350 Ø10 c/c 350
P5 – P6 1.261 0.00167 115.23 115.23 115.23 10 681.246203 350 Ø10 c/c 350
P5 –P9 1.57 0.00167 115.23 115.23 115.23 10 681.246203 350 Ø10 c/c 350
P6-P7 1.55 0.00167 115.23 115.23 115.23 10 681.246203 350 Ø10 c/c 350
P6-P10 2.008 0.00167 115.23 115.23 115.23 10 681.246203 350 Ø10 c/c 350
P7-P11 2.668 0.002203 152.007 115.23 152.007 10 516.423586 350 Ø10 c/c 350
P8-P9 1.233 0.00167 115.23 115.23 115.23 10 681.246203 350 Ø10 c/c 350
P9-P10 1.14 0.00167 115.23 115.23 115.23 10 681.246203 350 Ø10 c/c 350
P10-P11 1.36 0.00167 115.23 115.23 115.23 10 681.246203 350 Ø10 c/c 350

39
Table 5 Field reinforcement for Ground floor slab
Field Reinforcement
Panel M MAdjusted ρ As,cal As,min As,provide ф Scal Spro AsPro
MXf 2.33 0.001918 132.342 115.23 132.342 8 379.622493 350 Ø8 c/c 350
P1
Myf 1.45 0.00167 115.23 115.23 115.23 8 435.99757 350 Ø8 c/c 350
MXf 2.37 0.001951 134.619 115.23 134.619 8 373.201405 350 Ø8 c/c 350
P2
Myf 1.21 0.00167 115.23 115.23 115.23 8 435.99757 350 Ø8 c/c 350
MXf 1.98 0.00167 115.23 115.23 115.23 8 435.99757 350 Ø8 c/c 350
P3
Myf 1.13 0.00167 115.23 115.23 115.23 8 435.99757 350 Ø8 c/c 350
MXf 1.78 0.00167 115.23 115.23 115.23 8 435.99757 350 Ø8 c/c 350
P4
Myf 1.54 0.00167 115.23 115.23 115.23 8 435.99757 350 Ø8 c/c 350
MXf 1.064 0.00167 115.23 115.23 115.23 8 435.99757 350 Ø8 c/c 350
P5
Myf 0.945 0.00167 115.23 115.23 115.23 8 435.99757 350 Ø8 c/c 350
MXf 1.418 0.00167 115.23 115.23 115.23 8 435.99757 350 Ø8 c/c 350
P6
Myf 0.945 0.00167 115.23 115.23 115.23 8 435.99757 350 Ø8 c/c 350
MXf 2.13 0.00175 120.75 115.23 120.75 8 416.066253 350 Ø8 c/c 350
P7
Myf 1.632 0.00167 115.23 115.23 115.23 8 435.99757 350 Ø8 c/c 350
MXf 1.946 0.00167 115.23 115.23 115.23 8 435.99757 350 Ø8 c/c 350
P8
Myf 1.015 0.00167 115.23 115.23 115.23 8 435.99757 350 Ø8 c/c 350
MXf 1.345 0.00167 115.23 115.23 115.23 8 435.99757 350 Ø8 c/c 350
P9
Myf 1.51 0.00167 115.23 115.23 115.23 8 435.99757 350 Ø8 c/c 350
MXf 1.638 0.00167 115.23 115.23 115.23 8 435.99757 350 Ø8 c/c 350
P10
Myf 0.877 0.00167 115.23 115.23 115.23 8 435.99757 350 Ø8 c/c 350
MXf 1.97 0.00167 115.23 115.23 115.23 8 435.99757 350 Ø8 c/c 350
P11
Myf 1.24 0.00167 115.23 115.23 115.23 8 435.99757 350 Ø8 c/c 350

40
2.3.5. Load transfer to beam From Roof Floor slab
Load transfer to beam from two way solid slab

According to EBCS-2/1995, Page 114, the design loads on supporting beam and the design shear
force of two-way slab subjected to a uniformly distributed load considering torsion at corners
may be determined using the following equation.
Vx = βvx Pd Lx
Vy = βvy Pd Lx
The design load on supporting beam is assumed to be distributed over a length of 0.75 times the
span length of beam.
Figure 3 Distribution of load on a beam supporting a two way Spanning slab
For simplicity to distribute the load over the entire span of the beam, consider the following
beams:

41

 
3 V L 9
s
Case (i): FEM1 = 4 ∗ 24L (3L2 − 16 L2 )
Pd L2
Case (i): FEM2 = 12
Equating the two fixed end moments;

3 Vs L 9 Pd L2
∗ (3L2 − L2 ) =
4 24L 16 12
117
Pd = V
128 s
Pd = 0.914 Vs (The total load on a beam)

42
Panel Edge Pd LX LY/LX BVX BVY VX1 VY1 Coefficient Pdx Pdy
Continuous 0.59 0.4 8.152 5.526 0.914 7.451 5.051

P1 5.83 2.37 1.9
Discontinuous 0.39 0.26 5.388 3.592 4.925 3.283
Continuous 0.42 0.36 5.803 4.974 0.914 5.304 4.546
P2 5.83 2.4 1.16
Discontinuous 0.26 - 3.592 - 3.283 -
Continuous 0.49 0.36 6.770 4.974 0.914 6.188 4.546
P3 5.83 2.4 1.44
Discontinuous 0.33 - 4.559 - 4.167 -
Continuous 0.53 0.4 7.323 5.526 0.914 6.693 5.051
P4 5.83 2.41 1.43
Discontinuous 0.34 0.26 4.697 3.592 4.293 3.283
Continuous 0.36 0.33 4.974 4.559 0.914 4.546 4.167
P5 5.83 2.6 1.07
Discontinuous - - - - - -
Continuous 0.42 0.33 5.803 4.559 0.914 5.304 4.167

P6 5.83 2.6 1.33
Continuous 0.48 0.36 6.716 5.037 0.914 6.138 4.603

P7 5.83 2.6 1.33
Discontinuous 0.31 - 4.337 - 3.964 -
Continuous 0.59 0.4 7.567 5.130 0.914 6.916 4.689
P8 5.83 2.2 1.95
Discontinuous 0.39 0.26 5.002 3.334 4.571 3.047
6.007
Continuous 0.46 0.36 4.701 0.914 5.490 4.296
P9 5.83 2.24 1.25 2
Discontinuous 0.3 - 3.917 - 3.580 -
6.790
Continuous 0.52 0.36 4.701 6.206 4.296
7 0.914
P10 5.83 2.24 1.54
4.440
Discontinuous 0.34 - - 4.058 -
1
Continuous 0.53 0.4 6.921 5.223 6.326 4.774
0.914
P11 5.83 2.41 1.43 3.395 3.103
Discontinuous 0.34 0.26 4.440 4.058
392 3

43
Chapter Three
3. Design of slab
3.1. Objective
In reinforced concrete construction slabs are used to provide flat, useful surfaces. A
reinforced concrete slabs is a broad, flat plate, usually horizontal with top and bottom
surfaces parallel or nearly so. It may be supported by reinforced concrete beams (usually
cast monolithically with such beams) by masonry or reinforced concrete walls by structural
steel members, directly by columns or continuously by the ground. There are different types
of slab
 Solid slabs: are slab types which are supported by beam. There are two types of solid
slabs depending on their structural action mechanism
o One way slab: are slabs that are supported on two opposite sides only which case
the structural action of the slab is essentially one way, the loads being carried by
the slab in the direction perpendicular to the supporting beam.
o Two way slab: are slabs which are supported by beam on all four sides, so that
two way slab action is obtained. Intermediate beams may be provided. According to
Ethiopian Building Code Standard (EBCS 2); A slab subjected to predominantly
uniformly distributed loads may be considered to be one way spanning if either:
 It possess two free (unsupported) and sensibly parallel edges or
 If it is the central part of a sensibly rectangular slab supported on four
edges with a ratio of longer to a shorter span greater than two.
When the length of the span becomes greater, the span of slab increases and simple
reinforced concrete slab becomes more uneconomical. In that case, we prefer solid slab
floor system.

44

45
 Flat slab:-slabs in some cases may be carried directly by columns without the use of
beams or girders such slabs are called flat plates and are commonly used where spans
are not large and loads are not particularly heavy.

46
 Grid/ waffle slab:- Waffle slabs, also known as two-way ribbed flat, consist of a
combination of a flat flange plate, or deck and a system of equally spaced parallel beams,
or grillage, that may be arranged in either an orthogonal or skew assembly with monolithic
inter sections. Waffle slabs are being used increasingly in modern construction to reduce
dead weight. The system exhibits higher stiffness and smaller deflections. The normal
reinforced concrete waffled slab has benefits and is much more efficient over the normal
reinforced solid flat plate. The interior part of our slab is chosen to be waffle slab due to its
large span and in order to decrease the slabs own weight as its depth is smaller.
Waffle slabs have different forms, which are beams spanning between columns or other
supporting systems. The first figure shown below indicates beam-supported waffle slabs
where the waffles are extended to the beams. This type of system has a superior
performance, especially in peripheral shear, and usually results in slabs of minimum
thickness. They can thus be used in spanning longer distance and for carrying heavier
loads. Due to the associated construction and architectural problems, the use of waffle slabs
of this form is becoming increasingly unpopular. The system shown in the second figure,
beams are constructed in a beam zone as it is shown in the figure. The second system
shown in the third figure consists of a solid portion around the column having a depth equal
to the total slab depth; the solid portion is used in the case of heavy loads to satisfy the
shear capacity of the slab. The last system shown also in the fourth figure is called a fully
ribbed waffle slab as the ribs rest directly on the columns .This system is mostly employed
as an analytical model in research areas due to the fact that it is comparatively easier to
model and also easier to analyze.

47
3.2. Solid Slab Design

Steps to design solid slabs
 Determine the design constants

Ly
 Check Lx
Ly
≤ 2, two way slab
Lx
Ly
> 2, one way slab
Lx
 Identify support condition and pick values of βa

 Determine minimum depth for serviceability/slab thickness
𝑓𝑦𝑘 𝐿𝑒
𝑑 ≥ (0.4 + 0.6 )
400 𝛽𝑎
 Calculate design loads
 Analyze (for one way take 1m strip width and for two way slabs individual panels the
determine the bending moment and shear force.
 Calculate the shear and bending moment values.
 Check depth for flexure
Mmax
o 𝑑≥√
0.8 b f yd ρm (1−0.4 ρm)
𝑏 = 1𝑚
 Design for main reinforcement by design equation or design table or chart and check for
minimum and maximum provision
1 4∗𝑀
 𝜌 = 2 ∗ (𝐶1 − √𝐶1 2 − 𝑏∗𝑑2 ∗𝐶
𝑑
)
2
Where: 𝐶1 = 2.5 𝑓𝑜𝑟 𝑎𝑛𝑦 𝑐𝑟𝑜𝑠𝑠 − 𝑠𝑒𝑐𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛

𝐶2 = 0.32𝑓𝑐𝑑
0.5
𝐴𝑠 = 𝜌𝑏𝑑 , 𝜌𝑚𝑖𝑛 =
𝑓𝑦𝑘 (𝑀𝑝𝑎)

48
 Calculate the spacing of main reinforcement

According to EBCS-2/1995 Section 7.2.2.2(3), the spacing for main bars for slabs shall not
exceed the smaller of 2D or 350mm
2D
Smax ≤ {
350mm
Minimum reinforcement for temperature and shrinkage (distribution steel):
5D
Smax ≤ { in the longer direction
400mm
 Check for shear (check adequacy of thickness of slab for shear):
Thickness of slab is adequate for shear if the design shear stress developed in slab is less than or
equal to the shear strength provided by the slab.
 Check for development length
 Reinforcement detailing

49
3.3. Design solution for Basement floor slab
Figure 4 Basement Floor Plan

Slab resting on the ground
For the slabs resting on the ground surface, no moment is created and hence no need to perform
structural design for flexure. However, minimum reinforcement in both directions is provided to
prevent shrinkage of the slab, stress due to temperature variation and crushing of slab due to
concentrated loads.
0.5 0.5
ρmin = = = 0.00167
fyk 300
Use
 D = 100mm
 ∅ 8 Rainforcement
 25 mm clear cover
d = 100-25-4 =71 mm
Asmin = ρmin 𝑏𝑑 = 0.00167 ∗ 1000 ∗ 71 = 118.3mm²
b
Spacing(s) = as ∗
Asmin
π ∗ d2
∗ 1000
Spacing(s) = 4
118.3
Spacing(s) = 429.9 𝑚𝑚
2D = 200
Smax = < 429.9 mm
350
𝐓𝐡𝐞𝐫𝐞𝐟𝐨𝐫𝐞 𝐏𝐫𝐨𝐯𝐢𝐝𝐞 ∅ 𝟖 𝐜/𝐜 𝟐𝟎𝟎 𝐦 𝐦 𝐟𝐨𝐫 𝐞𝐚𝐜𝐡 𝐩𝐚𝐧𝐞𝐥 𝐢𝐧 𝐛𝐨𝐭𝐡 𝐝𝐢𝐫𝐞𝐜𝐭𝐢𝐨𝐧

50
3.4. Design solution for Ground floor solid slab
Stair
Figure 3.1. Ground Floor Slab Panel Selection

A. Design strength of materials (Steel and Concrete)
 Concrete
- γc = 1.5 for Class − I workmanship EBCS − 2 table 3.1

f
cu
- fck = 1.25 = 20MPa
0.85fck 0.85(20MPa)
- fcd = = = 11.33MPa
Υs 1.5
fck 2/3 (20)2/3

- fctd = 0.21 = 0.21 = 1.03MPa
Υc 1.5
- Ecm = 29Gpa
 Steel
- Steel grade = S-300
- Partial safety factor, s = 1.15 for class I work ……….. (EBCS-2, 1995 on table 3.1),
Page 22
- Yield strength, fyk = 300Mpa
- Design strength
For steel tension and compression:
f yk 300
f yd    260.87Mpa
s 1.15
- Es=200Mpa

51

f
yk L
a

 0.6 * 300  Le 𝐿𝑒
d   0.4   𝑑 = 0.85 ∗
 400   a 𝛽𝑎
For the Slab
Panel P1
4.8 4.7
P1 2.37
2.4 P1
2.4 2.37
4.57
4.7

𝟐 𝒂
𝒂𝒓 = ((𝟐𝒄 + 𝒂) ∗ )
𝟑 (𝒂 + 𝒄)
𝒂(𝒂−𝒄)
𝒃𝒓 = 𝒃 −
𝒃(𝒂+𝒄)
𝟐 𝟒. 𝟖
𝒂𝒓 = ((𝟐 ∗ 𝟒. 𝟓𝟕 + 𝟒. 𝟖) ∗ ) = 𝟒. 𝟕
𝟑 𝟒. 𝟖 + 𝟒. 𝟓𝟕
𝟒. 𝟖(𝟒. 𝟖 − 𝟒. 𝟓𝟕)
𝒃𝒓 = 𝟐. 𝟒 − = 𝟐. 𝟑𝟕
𝟓(𝟒. 𝟖 + 𝟒. 𝟓𝟕)
𝐿𝑦 4.7
𝐿𝑋

52
1 = 40
2 = 30
𝐿𝑒 2370
𝑑 = 0.85 ∗ = 0.85 ∗ = 𝟔𝟒. 𝟎𝟓 𝐦𝐦
𝐵𝑎 37
Panel P2
2.8
2.4
𝐿𝑦 2.8
= 2.4 = 1.16 < 2 Two way slab Le = 2400
𝐿𝑋
By interpolation βa=38.4
𝐿𝑒 2400
𝑑 = 0.85 ∗ = 0.85 ∗ = 𝟓𝟑. 𝟏𝟐𝟓 𝐦𝐦
𝐵𝑎 38.4

53
Summary
Table 6 Summary for depth determination for Ground floor slab

Boundary d
Support Ly Lx Depth
Ly/Lx Condition Ba Gover
Panel Condition Type
(mm) (mm) (mm) ning
Id
P1 End span 4.7 2.37 1.9 Two - way T-4 37 64.05
P2 End span 2.8 2.4 1.16 Two - way T-3 38.4 53.125
P5 Interior 2.8 2.6 1.07 Two - way T-1 44.3 49.88

span
P6 Interior 3.47 2.6 1.33 Two - way T-1 41.7 52.99 64.05
span
Note: - FOR OUR DESIGN WE USE THE SAME DEPTH FOR ALL OF THE SLAB TYPES
AS WE SEEN IN THE ABOVE TABLE.

54

Assumptions:
 Main Bar = Φ12
For Slab
d= 64.05 mm
D= 64.05 + ф/2 + cover
D= 64.05 + 12 /2 + 15 = 85.05 mm
Take D Used = 100 mm
dused = 100mm − 12/2mm − 15mm = 79 mm
Loading
4. Dead load
Without partition walls;
 Self-weight of slab=24*0.1= 2.4 KN/m2
 Load from floor finish(Ceramic)= 0.02*23= 0.46 KN/m2
 Load from cement screed=0.03*20= 0.6 KN/m2
 Load from plastering screed=0.015*20= 0.3 KN/m2
Summation= 3.76 KN/m2 without partition wall

55
Partition wall loads
Only P3, P4, P5, P6, P7, P8, P10 And P11 have Partition Wall
Table 7 partition wall loads on the slab
Panel Area (m2) D Hroom Lwall γhcb Load (KN/m2)
P-3 8.36 0.1 3.45 3.08 14 1.77
P-4 8.36 0.1 3.45 3.75 14 2.16
P-5 7.28 0.1 3.45 3.66 14 2.42
P-6 9.02 0.1 3.45 3.81 14 2.04
P-7 9.02 0.1 3.45 3.47 14 1.85
P-8 9.46 0.1 3.45 2.24 14 1.14
P-10 7.77 0.1 3.45 2.35 14 1.46
P-11 7.77 0.1 3.45 3.47 14 2.15
Take the maximum load that is on panel P-5 2.42 KN/m2 from partition
𝑃
dead load <=20%...if this met we can use the coefficient method
𝐸
2.42/14.99*100=16.14<=20% use the Coefficient method

Summary of dead load including partition
 P-1= 3.76 KN/m2  P-7= 3.76 + 1.85 = 5.61 KN/m2
 P-2= 3.76 KN/m2  P-8= 3.76 + 1.14= 4.9 KN/m2
 P-3= 3.76+ 1.77=5.53 KN/m2  P-9 = 3.76KN/m2
 P-4= 3.76+ 2.16=5.92 KN/m2  P-10= 3.76 + 1.46 = 5.22 KN/m2
 P-5= 3.76 + 2.16 = 5.92 KN/m2  P-11 = 3.76 +2.15 = 5.91KN/m2
 P-6= 3.76 + 2.04=5.8 KN/m2

56
5. Live load
Category D = 5KN/m2
Design Load Pd
Design load=1.35DL+1.5LL
 P-1= 12.576 KN/m2  P-7= 15.07 KN/m2
 P-2= 12.576 KN/m2  P-8= 14.11KN/m2
 P-3= 14.96 KN/m2  P-9=12.576 KN/m2

P-4=15.492KN/m2  P-10 = 14.547KN/m2
 P-5= 15.492KN/m2  P-11= 15.47KN/m2
 P-6= 15.33KN/m2

57
Analysis of individual panel

Mi=α*ρd*Lx2
P-1 T-4 2.37 4.7 1.9 12.57 0.091 0.068 0.047 0.036
6.425 4.801 3.318 2.541
P-2 T-3 2.4 2.8 1.16 12.57 0.053 0.04 0.039 0.03 3.837 2.896 2.823 2.172
P-3 T-3 2.4 3.47 1.44 14.96 0.07 0.053 0.039 0.03 6.031 4.566 3.360 2.585
P-4 T-4 2.41 3.47 1.43 15.49 0.075 0.056 0.047 0.036 6.747 5.038 4.228 3.238
P-5 T-1 2.6 2.8 1.07 15.49 0.036 0.027 0.032 0.024 3.769 2.827 3.350 2.513
P-6 T-1 2.6 3.47 1.33 15.33 0.047 0.036 0.032 0.024
4.870 3.730 3.316 2.487
P-7 T-4 2.6 3.47 1.33 15.07 0.071 0.052 0.047 0.036
7.232 5.297 4.788 3.667
P-8 T-4 2.2 4.3 1.95 14.11 0.093 0.069 0.047 0.036 6.351 4.712 3.209 2.458
P-9 T-3 2.24 2.8 1.25 12.55 0.059 0.044 0.039 0.03
3.715 2.770 2.455 1.88
P-10 T-3 2.24 3.47 1.54 14.55 0.074 0.056 0.039 0.03
5.402 4.088 2.847 2.19
P-11 T-4 2.41 3.47 1.43 15.47 0.075 0.056 0.047 0.036
6.738 5.031 4.223 3.23
o Mxs=α*Xs*Pd*Lx2
o Mys=α*Ys*Pd*Lx2
o Mxf=α*Xf*Pd*Lx2
o Mys=α*Yf*Pd*Lx2

58
A. Moment adjustments
for the design
5.19 3.2 3.87

3.87
2.81
3.01 Stair
2.64

59

4. For panel P-1
Between P-1 and P-2
o Δm= 6.425 – 2.823= 3.602
o Δm/M larger = 3.602/6.425*100= 56.06% > 20%; we need moment adjustment
o Dfs1=1/Lx1/(1/Lx1+1/Lx2) =1/2.81/(1/2.81+1/2.81) = 0.5
o Dfs2=1-0.5 = 0.5
o For P-1, MX3= 6.425-(3.602 * 0.5) = 4.624
o P-2= 2.823 + (3.602 * 0.5) = 4.624
5. For panel P-2

Between P-2 and P-3
o Δm= 3.36 – 2.823 = 0.537
o Δm/M larger= 0.537/3.36*100 = 15.98% <20%; no need for adjustment take the average
o (3.36 + 2.823)/2= 3.091
Between P2 and P5
o Δm= 3.837 – 3.769 = 0.068
o Δm/M larger= 0.068/3.837 *100 =1.77<20%; no need for adjustment take the average
3.837+3.769
o ( ) = 𝟑. 𝟖𝟎𝟑
2
6. For panel P-3
Between P-3 and P-4
o Δm= 4.228 – 3.36 = 0.868

o Δm/M larger= 0.868/4.228*100= 19.8% < 20%; no need for adjustment take the average
4.228+3.36
o ( ) = 𝟑. 𝟕𝟗𝟒
2
Between P-3 and P-6
o Δm = 6.03 – 4.87 = 1.16

6.03+4.87
o ( 2
) = 𝟓. 𝟒𝟓

60
7. For panel P-4
Between P-4 and P-7
o Δm = 7.232 – 6.747 = 0.485

o Δm/M larger = 0.485/7.232*100 = 6.706>20%; no need for adjustment take the average
7.232+6.747
o ( ) = 𝟔. 𝟗𝟖𝟗
2
8. For panel P-5
Between P-5 and P-6

o Δm = 3.35-3.316 = 0.034
o Δm/M larger = 0.034/3.35*100 = 1.01 > 20%; no need for adjustment take the average
3.35+3.316
o ( ) = 𝟑. 𝟑𝟑
2
Between P-5 and P-9

o Δm= 3.769 – 3.715 = 0.054
o Δm/M larger= 0.054/3.769*(100) = 1.43 %>20; no need for adjustment take the average
3.769+3.715
o ( ) = 𝟑. 𝟕𝟒𝟐
2
9. For panel P-6
Between P-6 and P-7
o Δm = 4.788 – 3.31 = 1.478

o Δm/M larger=1.478/4.788*100 = 30.86 %>20%; it needs adjustment
o Dfs5=1/Lx6/ (1/Lx6+1/Lx7) =1/3.01/ (1/3.01+1/3.01) = 0.5
o Dfs6= 1- 0.5 = 0.5
o For P-6; Mxs= 3.31 + (1.478 * 0.5) = 4.049
o P-7; Mxs= 4.788 -(1.478 * 0.5) = 4.049

61
Between P6 and P10

o Δm = 5.402 – 4.87 = 0.532
o Δm/M larger= 0.532/5.402*100 = 9.84 <100%>20%; no need for adjustment take the
average
5.402+4.87
o ( ) = 𝟓. 𝟏𝟑
2
10. For panel P-7
o Δm= 7.232 – 6.738 = 0.494

o Δm/M larger= 0.494/7.232*100 = 6.83 <20% no need for adjustment take the average
7.232 +6.738
o ( ) = 𝟔. 𝟗𝟖𝟓
2
11. For panel P-8
Between P-8 and P-9
o Δm= 3.209 – 2.455 = 0.754

o Δm/M larger= 0.754/3.209*100 = 23.4 > 20% it needs adjustment
o Dfs8 =1/Lx8/ (1/Lx8+1/Lx9) =1/2.64/ (1/2.64+1/2.64) = 0.5
o Dfs9 = 1- 0.5 = 0.5
o For P-6; Mxs= 3.209 + (0.754 * 0.5) = 3.586
o P-7; Mxs= 2.455 -(0.754 * 0.5) = 3.586
12. For panel P-9
o Δm= 2.847 – 2.455 = 0.392

o Δm/M larger= 0.392/2.847*100 = 13.76 < 20% no needs adjustment
2.847 +2.455
o ( ) = 𝟐. 𝟔𝟓𝟏
2

62
13. For panel P-10

o Δm= 4.223 – 2.847 = 1.376
o Dfs10 =1/Lx8/ (1/Lx8+1/Lx9) =1/2.64/ (1/2.64+1/2.64) = 0.5
o Dfs11 = 1- 0.5 = 0.5
o For P-10; Mxs= 2.847 + (1.376 * 0.5) = 3.53
o P-11; Mxs= 4.223 -(1.376 * 0.5) = 3.53

63

A. For Span P-1
For P1 and P2
Md = 4.624KNm
Δm = 6.425 – 4.624 = 1.801KNm
𝐿𝑦 4.7
= = 1.9 Cx = 0.258, Cy = 0.06
𝐿𝑥 2.37
Mxd = 4.8 + (0.258 * 1.801)

= 5.264KNm
Myd = 2.541 + (0.06 * 1.801)
= 2.649KNm
B. For P-2
So we don’t need to do For Both P2 & P1 and P2&P3
Only we adjust for this P2 & P5
 For P2 & P5
Md = 3.803KNm
Δm = 3.837 – 3.803 = 0.034KNm
𝐿𝑦 2.8
= = 1.16 Cx = 0.332, Cy = 0.368
𝐿𝑥 2.4
Mxd = 2.896+ (0.332 * 0.034)

= 2.907KNm
Myd = 2.172 + (0.368 * 0.034)
= 2.184KNm

64
C. For P-3
 For P3 & P2
Md = 3.091KNm
Δm1 = 3.36 – 3.091 = 0.269KNm
𝐿𝑥 3.87
= = 1.44 Cx1 = 0.311 , Cy1 = 0.104
𝐿𝑦 2.81
 For P3 & P6
Md = 5.45KNm
Δm2 = 6.03 – 5.45 = 0.58KNm
Determine Cx And Cy
Cx2 = 0.407
Cy2 = 0.323
So:-
Mxd = 4.566 + 0.311 * 0.269 + 0.407 * 0.58

Mxd = 4.88 KNm
Myd = 2.585 + 0.104 * 0.269 +0.323 * 0.58
Myd = 2.8 KNm

65
D. For P-4
 For P4 & P3
Md = 3.794KNm
Δm = 4.228 – 3.794 = 0.434KNm
𝐿𝑥 3.87
= = 1.44 Cx= 0.311 , Cy = 0.104
𝐿𝑦 2.81
Mxd = 5.038 + (0.311 * 0.434)

= 5.17KNm
Myd = 3.238 + (0.104 * 0.434)
= 3.28KNm
E. For P-5
 For P5 & P6
Md = 3.33KNm
Δm1 = 3.35 – 3.33 = 0.02KNm
𝐿𝑥 3.2
= = 1.06 Cx1 = 0.366 , Cy1 = 0.244
𝐿𝑦 3.01

66
 For P5 & P9
Md = 3.742KNm
Δm2 = 3.76 – 3.742 = 0.018KNm
Determine Cx And Cy
Cx2 = 0.3
Cy2 = 0.376
So:-
Mxd = 2.827 + 0.366 * 0.02 + 0.3 * 0.018
Mxd = 2.839 KNm
Myd = 2.513 + 0.244 * 0.02 +0.376 * 0.018
Myd = 2.52 KNm
F. For P6 No need for Span Adjustment

G. For P-7
So we need to do for Both P7 & P4, P7 & P6 and P7&P11

 For P7 & P4
Md = 6.989KNm
Δm1 = 7.232 – 6.989 = 0.243KNm
𝐿𝑦 3.87
= = 1.37 Cx1 = 0.49, Cy1 = 0.337
𝐿𝑥 2.81
 For P7 & P6
Md = 4.049KNm
Δm2 = 4.788 – 4.049 = 0.739KNm
Determine Cx And Cy
Cx2 = 0.318
Cy2 = 0.11

67
 For P7 & P11

Md = 6.985 KNm
Δm3 = 7.232 – 6.985 = 0.247KNm
Determine Cx And Cy
Cx3 = 0.49
Cy3 = 0.337
Mxd = 5.297 + 0.49 * 0.243 + 0.318 * 0.739+0.49*0.247
Mxd = 5.772 KNm
Myd = 3.667+ 0.337 * 0.243 + 0.11 * 0.739 + 0.337*0.247
Myd = 3.91 KNm
H. For P-8
 For P8 & P9
Md = 3.586KNm
Δm = 3.586 – 3.209 = 0.337KNm
𝐿𝑥 5.19
= = 1.95 Cx= 0.248 , Cy = 0.057
𝐿𝑦 2.64
Mxd = 4.712 + (0.248 * 0.337)

= 4.795KNm
Myd = 2.458 + (0.057 * 0.337)
= 2.477KNm
I. For P9 No need for Span Adjustment
J. For P10
So we need to do for Both P5 & P6 and P5 & P9

68
 For P10 & P6

Md = 5.13KNm
Δm1 = 5.402 – 5.13 = 0.272KNm
𝐿𝑦 3.87
= = 1.54 Cx1 = 0.43 , Cy1 = 0.302
𝐿𝑥 2.64
 For P10 & P9

Md = 2.651KNm
Δm2 = 2.847 – 2.651 = 0.196KNm
Determine Cx And Cy
Cx2 = 0.301
Cy2 = 0.09 So,
Mxd = 4.08 + 0.43 * 0.272 + 0.301 * 0.196
Mxd = 4.255 KNm
Myd = 2.19 + 0.302 * 0.272 +0.09 * 0.196
Myd = 2.289 KNm
K. For P-11
 For P11 & P10
Md = 3.53KNm
Δm = 4.223 – 3.53 = 0.693KNm
𝐿𝑦 3.87
= = 1.43 Cx = 0.312 , Cy = 0.105
𝐿𝑥 2.64
Mxd = 5.031 + (0.312 * 0.693)

= 3.446KNm
Myd = 3.23 + (0.105 * 0.693)
= 3.302KNm

69
Figure 5 Adjusted Moment Slab

70
Mmax
d=√
0.8 b fyd ρm (1 − 0.4 ρm)
Where:
 M max = Mu = 6.989 KN. m

 b = 1000mm
 fcd = 11.33 Mpa
 fyd = 260.87 Mp = 0.015
 m = 28.78
 C1 = 0.0869
 C2 = 3003.04
 𝜌𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 0.00167
 𝜌𝑚𝑎𝑥 = 0.75 𝜌𝑏 = 0.019
1 4∗𝑀
 𝜌 = 2 ∗ (𝐶1 − √𝐶1 2 − 𝑏∗𝑑2 ∗𝐶
𝑑
)
2
1 4 ∗ 6.989∗106
 𝜌 = 2 ∗ (0.0869 − √0.0869 2 − 1000∗79 2 ∗3003.04) = 0.00335

0.00167 < 0.00335 < 0.019
6.989 ∗ 106
d=√
0.8 ∗ 1000 ∗ 11.33 ∗ 0.019 ∗ 28.78(1 − 0.4 ∗ 0.019 ∗ 28.78)
𝐝 = 𝟒𝟐. 𝟒𝟖𝟑 𝐦𝐦 < 𝐝𝐮𝐬𝐞𝐝 = 𝟕𝟗𝐦𝐦 ----- Nice!!

71
3.4.3. Check depth for shear capacity (𝐕𝐂 > 𝐕𝐬𝐝 )
According to EBCS-2/1995, the design sheer force of two-way slab subjected to a uniformly
distributed load considering torsion at corners may be determined using the following equation.
𝑉𝑥 = 𝛽𝑣𝑥 𝑃𝑑 𝐿𝑥
𝑉𝑦 = 𝛽𝑣𝑦 𝑃𝑑 𝐿𝑥
Where: 𝛽𝑣𝑥 and 𝛽𝑣𝑦 are shear force coefficient given by the code as a function of span ratio and
support condition of the panel.
The shear force carried by concrete in slab can be taken as the one given for beams.
𝑉𝑐 = 0.25𝑓𝑐𝑡𝑑 𝐾1 𝐾2 𝑏𝑑
𝑏 = 1𝑚
Where:
𝐾1 = 1 + 50𝜌 ≤ 2.0
𝐾2 = 1.6 − 𝑑 ≥ 1 , 𝑑 𝑖𝑛 𝑚. For members were more than 50% of the bottom
reinforcement is curtailed, 𝐾2 = 1
𝐴𝑠
𝜌=
𝑏𝑤 𝑑
𝐴𝑠 = area of the tensile reinforcement anchored beyond the intersection of the
steel and the line of a possible 450 crack starting from the edge of the
section.(EBCS-2)
𝐴𝑠 = the area of tension reinforcement extending not less than 𝑑 + 𝑙𝑏,𝑛𝑒𝑡 beyond
the section considered.(Euro Code -2)
Figure 6 𝑨𝒔 to be introduced in equation above

72
If not satisfied the shear strength, revise with new depth. Shear reinforcement is provided for
solid slabs, the concrete shear capacity should resist all design shear force.
Therefore, the load transfer from the two way solid slabs to their respective girders can be
computed based on the formula given above and the result is summarized in table below. From
the table we see that the maximum shear load is 30.08 KN per 1m strip width.
𝑉𝑐 = 0.25 ∗ 1.032 ∗ 𝐾1 𝐾2 𝑏𝑑
𝐾1 = 1 + 50𝜌 ≤ 2.0
0.5
𝐾1 = 1 + 50 ∗ 𝜌𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 1 + 50 ∗ = 1.083
300
𝐾1 = 1.083
𝐾2 = 1.6 − 𝑑 ≥ 1
𝐾2 = 1.6 − 0.1 = 1.5
𝑉𝑐 = 0.25 ∗ 1.032 ∗ 1.083 ∗ 1.5 ∗ 1 ∗ 100 = 41.91 𝐾𝑁 > 𝑉𝑚𝑎𝑥
= 𝟏𝟗. 𝟕𝟖 𝑲𝑵 , 𝒐𝒌!
Therefore, the section is adequate for both flexure and shear.

73
B. Main (Flexural) reinforcement design
 b = 1000mm
 dused = 100 mm
0.5 0.5
 𝜌𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 𝑓 = 300 = 0.00167
 m=28.78
 C1 = 0.0869
 C2 = 3003.04
1 4∗𝑀
 𝜌 = 2 ∗ (𝐶1 − √𝐶1 2 − 𝑏∗𝑑2 ∗𝐶
𝑑
)
2
 𝐴𝑠 = 𝜌 ∗ 𝑏 ∗ 𝑑
𝐴𝑠𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 0.00167 ∗ 1000 ∗ 100
𝑨𝒔𝒎𝒊𝒏 = 𝟏𝟔𝟕 𝒎𝒎 ²
𝑏𝑎𝑠
𝑆=
𝐴𝑠
Where:
2D or 350mm
2D
350mm

74

P1 - P2 4.624 0.00293 231.47 167 231.47 10 339.1368 300 10c/c300
P2 - P3 3.091 0.00195 154.6 167 167 10 470.0599 350 10c/c350
P2 – P5 3.803 0.0024 189.6 167 189.6 10 414.0295 350 10c/c350
P3 – P4 3.794 0.0023 181.7 167 181.7 10 432.0308 350 10c/c350
P3 – P6 5.45 0.0034 268.6 167 268.6 10 292.2561 290 10c/c290
P4 – S7 6.989 0.0045 355.5 167 355.5 10 220.8158 220 10c/c220
P5 – P6 3.33 0.002 158 167 167 10 470.0599 350 10c/c350
P5 –P9 3.742 0.0023 181.7 167 181.7 10 432.0308 350 10c/c350
P6-P7 4.049 0.0025 197.5 167 197.5 10 397.4684 350 10c/c350
P6-P10 5.13 0.0032 252.8 167 252.8 10 310.5222 310 10c/c310
P7-P11 6.985 0.0045 355.5 167 355.5 10 220.8158 220 10c/c220
P8-P9 3.586 0.0022 173.8 167 173.8 10 451.6686 350 10c/c350
P9-P10 2.651 0.00167 126.4 167 167 10 470.0599 350 10c/c350
P10-P11 3.53 0.0022 173.8 167 173.8 10 451.6686 350 10c/c350

75
Field Reinforcement
Pane MAdjuste As,provid Spr
M ρ As,cal As,min ф Scal AsPro
l d e o
0.0033 265.4 189.27

MXf 5.264 167 265.44 8 180 Ø8 c/c 180
6 4 0
P1
0.0016 130.3 385.42
Myf 2.649 167 167 8 350 Ø 8 c/c 350
7 5 3
0.0018 143.7 349.42
MXf 2.907 167 167 8 340 Ø 8 c/c 340
2 8 2
P2
0.0016 107.4 467.60
Myf 2.184 167 167 8 350 Ø 8 c/c 350
7 4 9
0.0031 205.14
MXf 4.88 244.9 167 244.9 8 200 Ø 8 c/c 200
0 5
P3
0.0017 138.2 363.39
Myf 2.8 167 167 8 350 Ø 8 c/c 350
5 5 9
192.71
MXf 5.17 0.0033 260.7 167 260.7 8 190 Ø 8 c/c 190
1
P4
0.0020 162.7 308.71
Myf 3.28 167 167 8 300 Ø 8 c/c 300
6 4 3
0.0017 140.6 357.27
MXf 2.839 167 167 8 350 Ø 8 c/c 350
8 2 4
P5
0.0016 124.0 405.06
Myf 2.52 167 167 8 350 Ø 8 c/c 350
7 3 3
0.0023 185.6 270.61
MXf 3.73 167 185.65 8 270 Ø 8 c/c 270
5 5 6
P6
0.0016 122.4 410.28
Myf 2.487 167 167 8 350 Ø 8 c/c 350
7 5 9

76
0.0037 171.87
MXf 5.772 292.3 167 292.3 8 170 Ø 8 c/c 170
0 8
P7
0.0024 195.1 257.46
Myf 3.91 167 195.13 8 250 Ø 8 c/c 250
7 3 9
0.0030 240.9 208.50
MXf 4.795 167 240.95 8 200 Ø 8 c/c 200
5 5 8
P8
0.0016 121.6 412.95
Myf 2.477 167 167 8 350 Ø 8 c/c 350
7 6 4
0.0017 136.6 367.60
MXf 2.77 167 167 8 350 Ø 8 c/c 350
3 7 0
P9
0.0016 543.54
Myf 1.88 92.43 167 167 8 350 Ø 8 c/c 350
7 6
0.0026 210.9 238.18
MXf 4.225 167 210.93 8 230 Ø 8 c/c 230
7 3 3
P10
0.0016 112.1 447.85
Myf 2.289 167 167 8 350 Ø 8 c/c 350
7 8 1
0.0021 171.4 293.06
MXf 3.446 167 171.43 8 290 Ø 8 c/c 290
7 3 4
P11
0.0020 163.5 307.22
Myf 3.302 167 167 8 300 Ø 8 c/c 300
7 3 1

77
A. Secondary reinforcement for temperature and shrinkage
𝟓𝑫
𝑺𝒎𝒂𝒙 ≤{ 𝟒𝟎𝟎𝒎𝒎
𝟐𝟎% 𝒐𝒇 𝒕𝒉𝒆 𝒎𝒂𝒊𝒏 𝒍𝒐𝒏𝒈𝒊𝒕𝒖𝒅𝒊𝒏𝒂𝒍 𝒃𝒂𝒓𝒔
Assume = ∅ 8
5 ∗ 100
Smax ≤{ 400mm
20% of the main longitudinal bars
𝐏𝐫𝐨𝐯𝐢𝐝𝐞 ∅𝟖 𝐜/𝐜 𝟑𝟓𝟎 𝐅𝐨𝐫 𝐭𝐞𝐦𝐩𝐫𝐚𝐭𝐮𝐫𝐞 𝐚𝐧𝐝 𝐒𝐡𝐢𝐫𝐢𝐧𝐤𝐚𝐠𝐞
Reinforcement detailing
The reinforcement bars can be detailed in such a way that at least 50% of the positive bars
extends into the supports.
𝐿𝑥 𝐿𝑥
The negative bars may be terminated at a distance of or from the respective center line of
4 3
point of the support.

Shorter reinforcement is provided at the bottom of longitudinal bar, because bar in shorter span
has small deflection.
Refer Appendix - 2

78
3.4.5. Load transfer to beam From Ground Floor slab

Vx = βvx Pd Lx
Vy = βvy Pd Lx
Figure: 3.3 Distribution of load on a beam supporting a two way Spanning slab
beams:

79

 
3 V L 9
s
Case (i): FEM1 = 4 ∗ 24L (3L2 − 16 L2 )
Pd L2
Case (i): FEM2 = 12

3 Vs L 9 Pd L2
∗ (3L2 − L2 ) =
4 24L 16 12
117
Pd = V
128 s
Panel Type and Edge Pd LX LY/LX BVX BVY VX1 VY1 Coeff
Pdx Pdy
location icient
P1 Continuous 12.57 2.37 1.9 0.59 0.4 17.57 11.91 0.914 16.05 10.88
8 5
Discontinuous 0.39 0.26 11.6 7.74 10.60 7.074
2 3
P2 Continuous 12.57 2.4 1.16 0.42 0.36 12.67 10.86 0.914 11.58 9.926
0 0
Discontinuous 0.26 - 7.84 - 7.165 -
P3 Continuous 14.96 2.4 1.44 0.49 0.36 17.59 12.92 0.914 16.07 11.80
7 8
Discontinuous 0.33 - 11.84 - 10.82 -
P4 Continuous 15.49 2.41 1.43 0.53 0.4 19.78 14.93 0.914 18.07 13.64
8 6

80
Discontinuous 0.34 0.26 12.69 9.7 11.59

8 8.865
P5 Continuous 15.49 2.6 1.07 0.36 0.33 14.49 13.29 0.914 13.24 12.14
3 7
P6 Continuous 15.33 2.6 1.33 0.42 0.33 16.74 13.15 0.914 15.30 12.01
0 9
P7 Continuous 15.07 2.6 1.33 0.48 0.36 18.8 14.1 0.914 17.18 12.88
3 7
Discontinuous 0.31 - 12.1 - 11.05
9 -
P8 Continuous 14.11 2.2 1.95 0.59 0.4 18.31 12.41 0.914 16.73 11.34
5 2
Discontinuous 0.39 0.26 12.1 8.21 11.05
9 7.503
P9 Continuous 12.55 2.24 1.25 0.46 0.36 12.93 10.12 0.914 11.81
8 9.249
Discontinuous 0.3 - 8.43 - 7.705
0 -
P10 Continuous 14.55 2.24 1.54 0.52 0.36 16.94 11.73 0.914 15.48 10.72
3 1
Discontinuous 0.34 - 11.08 - 10.12 -
P11 Continuous 15.47 2.41 1.43 0.53 0.4 19.75 14.91 0.914 18.05 13.62
1 7
Discontinuous 0.34 0.26 12.67 9.69 11.58
0 8.856

81
3.5. Design solution for First floor solid slab
Stair
Figure 3.4. First Floor Slab Panel Selection

f
yk L
a

 0.6 * 300  Le 𝐿𝑒
d   0.4   𝑑 = 0.85 ∗
 400   a 𝛽𝑎

82
For the Slab
Panel P1
4.8 4.7
2.4 2.37
P1 P1
2.4
2.37
4.7
4.57

𝟐 𝒂
𝒂𝒓 = ((𝟐𝒄 + 𝒂) ∗ )
𝟑 (𝒂 + 𝒄)
𝒂(𝒂−𝒄)
𝒃𝒓 = 𝒃 −
𝒃(𝒂+𝒄)
𝟐 𝟒. 𝟖
𝒂𝒓 = ((𝟐 ∗ 𝟒. 𝟓𝟕 + 𝟒. 𝟖) ∗ ) = 𝟒. 𝟕
𝟑 𝟒. 𝟖 + 𝟒. 𝟓𝟕
𝟒. 𝟖(𝟒. 𝟖 − 𝟒. 𝟓𝟕)
𝒃𝒓 = 𝟐. 𝟒 − = 𝟐. 𝟑𝟕
𝟓(𝟒. 𝟖 + 𝟒. 𝟓𝟕)
𝐿𝑦 4.7
𝐿𝑋
1 = 40
2 = 30
𝐿𝑒 2370
𝑑 = 0.85 ∗ = 0.85 ∗ = 𝟔𝟒. 𝟎𝟓 𝐦𝐦
𝐵𝑎 37

83
Panel P3
3.47
2.41
𝐿𝑦 3.47
= = 1.44 < 2 Two way slab Le = 2400
𝐿𝑋 2.4
1 = 40
2 = 30
𝐿𝑒 2400
𝑑 = 0.85 ∗ = 0.85 ∗ = 𝟓𝟕. 𝟑 𝒎𝒎
𝐵𝑎 35.6

84
Summary

Boundary d
Support Ly Lx Depth
Ly/Lx Condition Ba Gover
Panel Condition (mm) Type
(mm) (mm) ning
Id

span

span
P7 End span 3.47 2.6 1.33 Two - way T-4 36.7 60.21 122.4
C1 End span 16.55 1.1 15.04 One -Way T-7 10 93.5
C3 End span 17 1.3 13.07 One -Way T-7 10 110.5

85

Assumptions:
 Main Bar = Φ12
For Slab
d= 122.4 mm
D= 122.4 + ф/2 + cover
D= 124.4 + 12 /2 + 15 = 145.4 mm
dused = 150mm − 12/2mm − 15mm = 129 mm
Loading
 Dead load

86

Only P1, P3, P4, P6, P7, C1, C2,C3 have Partition Wall
Table 11 partition wall loads on the slab
P-1 11.139 0.15 3.45 5.7 14 3.707379
P-3 8.36 0.15 3.45 2.83 14 2.452554
P-4 8.36 0.15 3.45 2.83 14 2.452554
P-6 9.02 0.15 3.45 3.87 14 3.108442
P-7 9.02 0.15 3.45 3.87 14 3.108442
C-1 18.205 0.15 3.45 2.7 14 1.074512
C-2 13.737 0.15 3.45 2.6 14 1.37126
C3 22.1 0.15 3.45 2.6 14 0.887
𝑃
𝐸
3.7/19.01*100=19<=20% use the Coefficient method

 P-1= 3.7+4.96 = 8.66 KN/m2  P-9 = 4.96 KN/m2
 P-2= 4.96 KN/m2  P-10= 4.96 KN/m2
 P-3= 2.45+ 4.96 = 7.41 KN/m2  P-11 = 4.96 KN/m2
 P-4= 2.45+ 4.96 = 7.41 KN/m2  C-1 = 1.07+4.96 = 6.03KN/m2
 P-5= 4.96 KN/m2  C-2 = 1.37+4.96 = 6.33 KN/m2
 P-6= 3.1 + 4.96 = 8.06 KN/m2  C-3 = 0.887 + 4.96 = 5.847 KN/m2
 P-7= 3.1 + 4.96 = 8.06 KN/m2
 P-8= 4.96 KN/m2

87
 Live load
Category D= 5KN/m2 For Shopping
Category B = 3 KN/m2 For Cafe
Design Load Pd
 P-1= 19.191KN/m2  P-7= 18.38 KN/m2
 P-2= 14.196KN/m2  P-8= 14.19KN/m2
 P-3= 17.5KN/m2  P-9= 14.19 KN/m2

P-4=17.5KN/m2  P-10 = 11.19KN/m2
 P-5= 14.196KN/m2  P-11= 11.19KN/m2
 P-6= 18.38KN/m2  C-1 = 12.64 KN/m2
 C-3 = 12.39 KN/m2  C-2 = 13.04 KN/m2

88

Mi=α*ρd*Lx2
P-1 T-4 2.37 4.7 1.9 19.191 0.091 0.068 0.047 0.036 9.809 7.329 5.066 3.880
P-2 T-3 2.4 2.8 1.16 14.196 0.053 0.04 0.039 0.03 4.333 3.270 3.188 2.453
P-3 T-3 2.4 3.47 1.44 17.5035 0.07 0.053 0.039 0.03 7.057 5.343 3.931 3.024
P-4 T-4 2.41 3.47 1.43 17.5035 0.075 0.056 0.047 0.036 7.624 5.693 4.778 3.659
P-5 T-1 2.6 2.8 1.07 14.196 0.036 0.027 0.032 0.024 3.454 2.591 3.070 2.303
P-6 T-1 2.6 3.47 1.33 18.381 0.047 0.036 0.032 0.024 5.840 4.47 3.976 2.982
P-7 T-4 2.6 3.47 1.33 18.381 0.071 0.052 0.047 0.036 8.822 6.461 5.840 4.47
P-8 T-4 2.2 4.3 1.95 14.196 0.093 0.069 0.047 0.036 6.389 4.740 3.229 2.473
P-9 T-3 2.24 2.8 1.25 14.196 0.059 0.044 0.039 0.03 4.202 3.134 2.777 2.136
P-10 T-3 2.24 3.47 1.54 11.196 0.074 0.056 0.039 0.03 4.157 3.145 2.190 1.685
P-11 T-4 2.41 3.47 1.43 11.196 0.075 0.056 0.047 0.036 4.877 3.641 3.056 2.340
C-1 T-7 1.1 16.55 15.04 12.6405 0.098 - - - 1.498 - - -
C-2 T-7 1.44 9.54 6.625 13.0455 0.098 - - - 2.651 - - -
C-3 T-7 1.3 17 13.07 12.39345 0.098 - - - 2.052 - - -
o Mxs=α*Xs*Pd*Lx2
o Mys=α*Ys*Pd*Lx2
o Mxf=α*Xf*Pd*Lx2
o Mys=α*Yf*Pd*Lx2

89
B. Moment adjustments
for the design
5.19 3.2 3.87 3.87
2.81
Stair
3.01
2.64

90

1. For panel P-1
Between P-1 and P-2
o Δm= 5.06 – 3.18= 1.88
o Δm/M larger = 1.88/5.06*100= 37.15% > 20%; we need moment adjustment
o Dfs1=1/Lx1/(1/Lx1+1/Lx2) =1/2.81/(1/2.81+1/2.81) = 0.5
o Dfs2=1-0.5 = 0.5
o For P-1, MX3= 5.06-(1.88 * 0.5) = 4.12
o P-2= 3.18 + (1.88 * 0.5) = 4.12
2. For panel P-2
Between P-2 and P-3
o Δm= 3.93 – 3.18 = 0.75
o Δm/M larger= 0.75/3.93*100 = 19% <20%; no need for adjustment take the average
o (3.93 + 3.18)/2= 3.55
Between P2 and P5
o Δm= 4.33 – 3.45 = 0.88
o Δm/M larger= 0.88/4.33 *100 = 20.32 >20%; we need moment adjustment
o Dfs1=1/Lx2/(1/Lx2+1/Lx5) =1/2.81/(1/2.81+1/3.01) = 0.68
o Dfs2=1-0.68 = 0.32
o For P-1, MX2= 4.33 -(0.88 * 0.68) = 3.73
o Mx5= 3.45 + (0.88 * 0.32) = 3.73
3. For panel P-3
Between P-3 and P-4
o Δm= 4.77 – 3.93 = 0.84

o Δm/M larger= 0.84/4.77*100 = 17.6% < 20%; no need for adjustment take the average
4.77+3.93
o ( ) = 𝟒. 𝟑𝟓
2

91
Between P-3 and P-6

o Δm = 7.05 – 5.84 = 1.21
7.05+5.84
o ( ) = 𝟔. 𝟒𝟒
2
4. For panel P-4
Between P-4 and P-7
o Δm = 8.82 – 7.62 = 1.2

o Δm/M larger = 1.2/8.82*100 = 13.6 < 20%; no need for adjustment take the average
8.82+7.62
o ( ) = 𝟖. 𝟐𝟐
2
5. For panel P-5
Between P-5 and P-6
o Δm = 3.97-3.07 = 0.9
o Δm/M larger = 0.9/3.97*100 = 22.67 > 20%; we need moment adjustment
o Dfs1=1/Lx5/(1/Lx5+1/Lx6) =1/3.01/(1/3.01+1/3.01) = 0.5
o Dfs2=1-0.5 = 0.5
o For P-1, MX3= 3.97 -(0.9 * 0.5) = 3.52
o P-2= 3.07 + (0.9 * 0.5) = 3.52
Between P-5 and P-9

o Δm= 4.2 - 3.45 = 0.75
o Δm/M larger= 0.75/4.2*(100) = 17.85% < 20; no need for adjustment take the average
4.2+3.45
o ( ) = 𝟑. 𝟖𝟐𝟓
2

92
6. For panel P-6
Between P-6 and P-7
o Δm = 5.84 – 3.97 = 1.87

o Δm/M larger=1.87/5.84*100 = 32.02% > 20%; it needs adjustment
o Dfs5=1/Lx6/ (1/Lx6+1/Lx7) =1/3.01/ (1/3.01+1/3.01) = 0.5
o Dfs6= 1- 0.5 = 0.5
o For P-6; Mxs= 5.84 - (1.87 * 0.5) = 4.905
o P-7; Mxs= 3.97 + (1.87 * 0.5) = 4.905
Between P6 and P10
o Δm = 5.84 – 4.15 = 1.69

o Δm/M larger= 1.69/5.84*100 = 28.9% > 20%; it needs adjustment
o Dfs5=1/Lx6/ (1/Lx6+1/Lx10) =1/3.01/ (1/3.01+1/2.64) = 0.46
o Dfs6= 1- 0.46 = 0.54
o For P-6; Mxs= 5.84 - (1.69 * 0.46) = 5.06
o P-7; Mxs= 4.15 + (1.69 * 0.54) = 5.06
7. For panel P-7
o Δm= 8.8 – 4.87 = 3.93

o Dfs5=1/Lx7/ (1/Lx7+1/Lx11) =1/3.01/ (1/3.01+1/2.64) = 0.46
o Dfs6= 1- 0.46 = 0.54
o For P-6; Mxs= 8.8 - (3.93 * 0.46) = 6.99
o P-7; Mxs= 3.93 + (3.93 * 0.54) = 6.99

93
8. For panel P-8
Between P-8 and P-9
14. Δm= 3.23 – 2.78 = 0.45

o Δm/M larger= 0.45/3.23*100 = 13.9 < 20% it needs adjustment
o Dfs8 =1/Lx8/ (1/Lx8+1/Lx9) =1/2.64/ (1/2.64+1/2.64) = 0.5
o Dfs9 = 1- 0.5 = 0.5
o For P-6; Mxs= 3.23 - (0.45 * 0.5) = 3.005
o P-7; Mxs= 2.78 + (0.45 * 0.5) = 3.005
9. For panel P-9
 Δm= 2.78 – 2.19 = 0.59

o Dfs8 =1/Lx9/ (1/Lx9+1/Lx10) =1/2.64/ (1/2.64+1/2.64) = 0.5
o Dfs9 = 1- 0.5 = 0.5
o For P-6; Mxs= 2.78 - (0.59 * 0.5) = 2.48
o P-7; Mxs= 2.19 + (0.59 * 0.5) = 2.48
10. For panel P-10

 Δm= 3.05 – 2.19 = 0.86
o Dfs10 =1/Lx10/ (1/Lx10+1/Lx11) =1/2.64/ (1/2.64+1/2.64) = 0.5
o Dfs11 = 1- 0.5 = 0.5
o For P-10; Mxs= 3.05 - (0.86 * 0.5) = 2.62
o P-11; Mxs= 2.19 +(0.86 * 0.5) = 2.62

94
11. For C1 (Cantilever 1)
Between P-1 and C-1 Between P-3 and C-1

Mxs = 9.809 Mxs = 7.05
Mxs = 4.35 Mxs = 7.62

Mys = 4.77 Mys = 3.056
Between P-7 and C-2
Mys = 5.84

Mxs = 6.389 Mxs = 4.15
Mxs = 4.2 Mxs = 4.87

95

L. For Span P-1
For P1 and P2
Md = 4.12 KNm
Δm = 5.06 – 4.12 = 0.94KNm
𝐿𝑦 4.7
= = 1.9 Cx = 0.258, Cy = 0.06
𝐿𝑥 2.37
Mxd = 7.329 + (0.258 * 0.94)

= 7.57 KNm
Myd = 3.88 + (0.06 * 0.94)
= 3.93 KNm

96
M. For P-2
So we don’t need to do For Both P2 & P1 And P2&P3
Only we Adjust for this P2 & P5
 For P2 & P5
Md = 3.73KNm
Δm = 4.33 – 3.73 = 0.6KNm
𝐿𝑦 2.8
= = 1.16 Cx = 0.332, Cy = 0.368
𝐿𝑥 2.4
Mxd = 3.27 + (0.332 * 0.6)

= 3.46KNm
Myd = 2.45 + (0.368 * 0.6)
= 2.67KNm

97
N. For P-3
 For P3 & P2
Md = 3.55KNm
Δm1 = 3.93 – 3.55 = 0.38KNm
𝐿𝑥 3.87
= = 1.44 Cx1 = 0.311 , Cy1 = 0.104
𝐿𝑦 2.81
 For P3 & P6
Md = 6.44KNm
Δm2 = 7.05 – 6.44 = 0.61KNm
Determine Cx And Cy
Cx2 = 0.407
Cy2 = 0.323
So:-
Mxd = 5.34 + 0.311 * 0.38 + 0.407 * 0.61
Mxd = 5.7 KNm
Myd = 3.02+ 0.104 * 0.38 +0.323 * 0.61
Myd = 3.25 KNm

98
O. For P-4
 For P4 & P3
Md = 4.35KNm
Δm = 4.77 – 4.35 = 0.42KNm
𝐿𝑥 3.87
= = 1.44 Cx= 0.311 , Cy = 0.104
𝐿𝑦 2.81
Mxd = 5.69 + (0.311 * 0.42)

= 5.82KNm
Myd = 3.65 + (0.104 * 0.42)
= 3.69KNm
P. For P-5
 No need for Span Adjustment
Q. For P-6
 For P6 & P5
Md = 3.52KNm
Δm1 = 3.97 – 3.52 = 0.45KNm
𝐿𝑥 3.2
= = 1.06 Cx1 = 0.366 , Cy1 = 0.244
𝐿𝑦 3.01
 For P6 & P10

Md = 5.06KNm
Δm2 = 5.84 – 5.06 = 0.78KNm
Determine Cx And Cy
Cx2 = 0.3
Cy2 = 0.376

99
So:-
Mxd = 4.47 + 0.366 * 0.45 + 0.3 * 0.78

Mxd = 4.86 KNm
Myd = 2.98 + 0.244 * 0.45 +0.376 * 0.78
Myd = 3.38KNm
R. For P-7
So we need to do for Both P7 & P4, P7 & P6 And P7&P11

 For P7 & P4
Md = 8.22KNm
Δm1 = 8.82 – 8.22 = 0.6KNm
𝐿𝑦 3.87
= = 1.37 Cx1 = 0.49, Cy1 = 0.337
𝐿𝑥 2.81
 For P7 & P6
Md = 4.905KNm
Δm2 = 5.85 – 4.905 = 0.945KNm
Determine Cx And Cy
Cx2 = 0.318
Cy2 = 0.11
 For P7 & P11

Md = 6.99 KNm
Δm3 = 8.82 – 6.99 = 1.83KNm
Determine Cx And Cy

100
Cx3 = 0.49
Cy3 = 0.337
Mxd = 6.46 + 0.49 * 0.6 + 0.318 * 0.945+0.49*1.83

Mxd = 7.95 KNm
Myd = 4.47+ 0.337 * 0.6 + 0.11 * 0.945 + 0.337*1.83
Myd = 5.39 KNm
S. For P-8
 For P8 & P9
Md = 3.005KNm
Δm = 3.23 – 3.005 = 0.225KNm
𝐿𝑥 5.19
= = 1.95 Cx= 0.248 , Cy = 0.057
𝐿𝑦 2.64
Mxd = 4.74+ (0.248 * 0.225)

= 4.79KNm
Myd = 2.47 + (0.057 * 0.225)
= 2.48KNm
T. For P9
For P9 & P5
Md = 3.825KNm
Δm1 = 4.2 – 3.825 = 0.375KNm
𝐿𝑦 3.2
= = 1.2 Cx1 = 0.344 , Cy1 = 0.364
𝐿𝑥 2.64

101
For P9 & P10

Md = 2.48KNm
Δm2 = 2.78 – 2.48 = 0.3KNm
Determine Cx And Cy
Cx2 = 0.338
Cy2 = 0.172
Mxd = 3.13 + 0.344 * 0.375 + 0.364 * 0.3
Mxd = 3.36 KNm
Myd = 2.13 + 0.364 * 0.375 +0.172 * 0.3
Myd = 2.31KNm
U. For P10
V. For P-11
 For P11 & P10
Md = 2.62KNm
Δm = 3.05 – 2.62 = 0.43KNm
𝐿𝑦 3.87
= = 1.43 Cx = 0.312 , Cy = 0.105
𝐿𝑥 2.64
Mxd = 3.64 + (0.312 * 0.43)

= 3.774KNm
Myd = 2.34 + (0.105 * 0.43)
= 2.38KNm

102

103
Mmax
d=√
0.8 b fyd ρm (1 − 0.4 ρm)
Where:
 M max = Mu = 9.809 KN. m

 b = 1000mm
 fcd = 11.33 Mpa
 fyd = 260.87 Mp = 0.015
 m = 28.78
 C1 = 0.0869
 C2 = 3003.04
 𝜌𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 0.00167
 𝜌𝑚𝑎𝑥 = 0.75 𝜌𝑏 = 0.019
1 4∗𝑀
 𝜌 = 2 ∗ (𝐶1 − √𝐶1 2 − 𝑏∗𝑑2 ∗𝐶
𝑑
)
2
1 4 ∗ 9.809∗106
 𝜌 = 2 ∗ (0.0869 − √0.0869 2 − 1000∗129 2 ∗3003.04) = 0.00235

0.00167 < 0.00235 < 0.019
9.809 ∗ 106
d=√
0.8 ∗ 1000 ∗ 11.33 ∗ 0.019 ∗ 28.78(1 − 0.4 ∗ 0.019 ∗ 28.78)
𝐝 = 𝟓𝟎. 𝟑𝟑 𝐦𝐦 < 𝐝𝐮𝐬𝐞𝐝 = 𝟏𝟐𝟗𝐦𝐦 ----- Nice!!

104
3.5.3. Check depth for shear capacity (𝐕𝐂 > 𝐕𝐬𝐝 )
𝑉𝑥 = 𝛽𝑣𝑥 𝑃𝑑 𝐿𝑥
𝑉𝑦 = 𝛽𝑣𝑦 𝑃𝑑 𝐿𝑥
Max Shear = 26.834
𝑉𝑐 = 0.25 ∗ 1.032 ∗ 𝐾1 𝐾2 𝑏𝑑
𝐾1 = 1 + 50𝜌 ≤ 2.0
0.5
𝐾1 = 1 + 50 ∗ 𝜌𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 1 + 50 ∗ = 1.083
300
𝐾1 = 1.083
𝐾2 = 1.6 − 𝑑 ≥ 1
𝐾2 = 1.6 − 0.15 = 1.45
𝑉𝑐 = 0.25 ∗ 1.032 ∗ 1.083 ∗ 1.5 ∗ 1 ∗ 150 = 62.86 𝐾𝑁 > 𝑉𝑚𝑎𝑥
= 𝟐𝟔. 𝟖𝟑𝟒 𝑲𝑵 , 𝒐𝒌!
Therefore, the section is adequate for both flexure and shear.

105
C. Main (Flexural) reinforcement design
 b = 1000mm
 dused = 150 mm
0.5 0.5
 𝜌𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 𝑓 = 300 = 0.00167
 m=28.78
 C1 = 0.0869
 C2 = 3003.04
1 4∗𝑀
 𝜌 = 2 ∗ (𝐶1 − √𝐶1 2 − 𝑏∗𝑑2 ∗𝐶
𝑑
)
2
 𝐴𝑠 = 𝜌 ∗ 𝑏 ∗ 𝑑
𝐴𝑠𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 0.00167 ∗ 1000 ∗ 150
𝑨𝒔𝒎𝒊𝒏 = 𝟐𝟓𝟎. 𝟓 𝒎𝒎 ²
𝑏𝑎𝑠
𝑆=
𝐴𝑠
Where:
2D or 350mm
2D
350mm

106

P1 - P2 4.12 0.00167 250.5 250.2 250.2 10 313.749 310 10c/c310
P2 - P3 3.55 0.00167 250.5 250.2 250.2 10 313.749 310 10c/c310
P2 – P5 3.73 0.00167 250.5 250.2 250.2 10 313.749 310 10c/c310
P3 – P4 4.35 0.00167 250.5 250.2 250.2 10 313.749 310 10c/c310
P3 – P6 6.44 0.00167 250.5 250.2 250.2 10 313.749 310 10c/c310
P4 – S7 8.22 0.0019 285 250.2 285 10 275.4386 270 10c/c270
P5 – P6 3.52 0.00167 250.5 250.2 250.2 10 313.749 310 10c/c310
P5 –P9 3.825 0.00167 250.5 250.2 250.2 10 313.749 310 10c/c310
P6-P7 4.905 0.00167 250.5 250.2 250.2 10 313.749 310 10c/c310
P6-P10 5.06 0.00167 250.5 250.2 250.2 10 313.749 310 10c/c310
P7-P11 6.99 0.00167 250.5 250.2 250.2 10 313.749 310 10c/c310
P8-P9 3.005 0.00167 250.5 250.2 250.2 10 313.749 310 10c/c310
P9-P10 2.48 0.00167 250.5 250.2 250.2 10 313.749 310 10c/c310
P10-P11 2.62 0.00167 250.5 250.2 250.2 10 313.749 310 10c/c310
P1-C1 9.80 0.0021 315 250.2 310 10 253.22 250 10c/c250
P2 – C1 4.35 0.00167 250.5 250.2 250.2 10 313.749 310 10c/c310
P3-C1 7.05 0.00172 258 250.2 258 10 304.26 300 10c/c300
P4-C1 7.62 0.00174 261 250.2 261 10 300.76 300 10c/c300
P4-C2 4.77 0.00167 250.5 250.2 250.5 10 313.749 310 10c/c310
P7-C2 5.84 0.00167 250.5 250.2 250.5 10 313.749 310 10c/c310
P11-C2 3.05 0.00167 250.5 250.2 250.5 10 313.749 310 10c/c310
P8-C3 6.39 0.00167 250.5 250.2 250.5 10 313.749 310 10c/c310
P9 –C3 4.2 0.00167 250.5 250.2 250.5 10 313.749 310 10c/c310
P10-C3 4.15 0.00167 250.5 250.2 250.5 10 313.749 310 10c/c310
P11-C3 4.87 0.00167 250.5 250.2 250.5 10 313.749 310 10c/c310

107
Field Reinforcement
Panel M MAdjusted ρ As,cal As,min As,provide ф Scal Spro AsPro
MXf 7.57 0.00178 267 250.2 260 8 193.23 190 Ø8 c/c 190
P1
Myf 3.93 0.00167 250.2 250.2 250.2 8 200.7994 200 Ø 8 c/c 200
MXf 3.46 0.00167 250.2 250.2 250.2 8 200.7994 200 Ø 8 c/c 200
P2
Myf 2.67 0.00167 250.2 250.2 250.2 8 200.7994 200 Ø 8 c/c 200
MXf 5.7 0.00167 250.2 250.2 250.2 8 200.7994 200 Ø 8 c/c 200
P3
Myf 3.25 0.00167 250.2 250.2 250.2 8 200.7994 200 Ø 8 c/c 200
MXf 5.82 0.00167 250.2 250.2 250.2 8 200.7994 200 Ø 8 c/c 200
P4
Myf 3.69 0.00167 250.2 250.2 250.2 8 200.7994 200 Ø 8 c/c 200
MXf 2.59 0.00167 250.2 250.2 250.2 8 200.7994 200 Ø 8 c/c 200
P5
Myf 2.3 0.00167 250.2 250.2 250.2 8 200.7994 200 Ø 8 c/c 200
MXf 4.86 0.00167 250.2 250.2 250.2 8 200.7994 200 Ø 8 c/c 200
P6
Myf 3.38 0.00167 250.2 250.2 250.2 8 200.7994 200 Ø 8 c/c 200
MXf 7.95 0.00187 280.5 250.2 280 8 179.42 170 Ø 8 c/c 170
P7
Myf 5.39 0.00167 250.2 250.2 250.2 8 200.7994 200 Ø 8 c/c 200
MXf 4.79 0.00167 250.2 250.2 250.2 8 200.7994 200 Ø 8 c/c 200
P8
Myf 2.48 0.00167 250.2 250.2 250.2 8 200.7994 200 Ø 8 c/c 200
MXf 3.36 0.00167 250.2 250.2 250.2 8 200.7994 200 Ø 8 c/c 200
P9
Myf 2.31 0.00167 250.2 250.2 250.2 8 200.7994 200 Ø 8 c/c 200
MXf 3.14 0.00167 250.2 250.2 250.2 8 200.7994 200 Ø 8 c/c 200
P10
Myf 1.16 0.00167 250.2 250.2 250.2 8 200.7994 200 Ø 8 c/c 200
MXf 3.774 0.00167 250.2 250.2 250.2 8 200.7994 200 Ø 8 c/c 200
P11
Myf 2.38 0.00167 250.2 250.2 250.2 8 200.7994 200 Ø 8 c/c 200

108
B. Secondary reinforcement for temperature and shrinkage
𝟓𝑫
𝑺𝒎𝒂𝒙 ≤{ 𝟒𝟎𝟎𝒎𝒎
𝟐𝟎% 𝒐𝒇 𝒕𝒉𝒆 𝒎𝒂𝒊𝒏 𝒍𝒐𝒏𝒈𝒊𝒕𝒖𝒅𝒊𝒏𝒂𝒍 𝒃𝒂𝒓𝒔
Assume = ∅ 8
5 ∗ 150
Smax ≤ { 400mm
20% of the main longitudinal bars
𝐏𝐫𝐨𝐯𝐢𝐝𝐞 ∅𝟖 𝐜/𝐜 𝟑𝟓𝟎 𝐅𝐨𝐫 𝐭𝐞𝐦𝐩𝐫𝐚𝐭𝐮𝐫𝐞 𝐚𝐧𝐝 𝐒𝐡𝐢𝐫𝐢𝐧𝐤𝐚𝐠𝐞
Refer Appendix - 2

109
3.5.5. Load transfer to beam From First Floor slab

Vx = βvx Pd Lx
Vy = βvy Pd Lx
Figure: 3.9 Distribution of load on a beam supporting a two way Spanning slab
beams:

 
3 V L 9
s
Case (i): FEM1 = 4 ∗ 24L (3L2 − 16 L2 )
Pd L2
Case (i): FEM2 = 12

3 Vs L 9 Pd L2
∗ (3L2 − L2 ) =
4 24L 16 12
117
Pd = V
128 s

110
Panel Type and Edge Pd LX LY/LX BVX BVY VX1 VY1 Coeff
Pdx Pdy
location icient
P1 Continuous 19.19 2.37 1.9 0.59 0.4 26.83 0.914 24.52 16.62
4 18.19 6 8
Discontinuous 0.39 0.26 17.73 16.21 10.80
8 11.82 2 8
P2 Continuous 14.19 2.4 1.16 0.42 0.36 14.30 0.914 13.07 11.21
9 12.26 8 0
Discontinuous 0.26 - 8.858
3 - 8.096 -
P3 Continuous 17.5 2.4 1.44 0.49 0.36 20.58 0.914 18.81 13.82
4 15.12 3 2
Discontinuous 0.33 - 13.86 12.66
2 - 9 -
P4 Continuous 17.5 2.41 1.43 0.53 0.4 22.35 0.914 20.43 15.42
7 16.87 4 2
Discontinuous 0.34 0.26 14.34 13.10 10.02
2 10.96 8 4
P5 Continuous 14.19 2.6 1.07 0.36 0.33 13.28 0.914 12.14 11.13
7 12.18 4 2
P6 Continuous 18.38 2.6 1.33 0.42 0.33 20.07 0.914 18.34 14.41
2 15.77 5 4
P7 Continuous 18.38 2.6 1.33 0.48 0.36 22.93 0.914 20.96 15.72
9 17.20 6 5
Discontinuous 0.31 - 14.81 - 13.54 -

111
5 0
P8 Continuous 14.19 2.2 1.95 0.59 0.4 18.42 0.914 16.84 11.41
6 12.49 1 8
Discontinuous 0.39 0.26 12.18 11.13 7.421
0 8.120 2 7
P9 Continuous 14.19 2.24 1.25 0.46 0.36 14.62 0.914 13.36 10.46
7 11.44 9 3
7 - 2 -
P10 Continuous 14.19 2.24 1.54 0.52 0.36 13.04 0.914 11.91 8.252
1 9.028 9 0
8 - 4 -
P11 Continuous 11.19 2.41 1.43 0.53 0.4 14.30 0.914 13.07 9.864
0 10.79 0 7
Discontinuous 0.34 0.26 9.174 8.385 6.412
0 7.015 0 0

112
3.6. Design solution for 2nd-4th floor solid slab
Figure 3.2 2nd-4th Slab Panel Selection

A. Design Strength of materials (Steel and Concrete)
 Concrete
cuf
- fck = 1.25 = 20MPa
0.85fck 0.85(20MPa)
- fcd = = = 11.33MPa
Υs 1.5
fck 2/3 (20)2/3

- fctd = 0.21 = 0.21 = 1.03MPa
Υc 1.5
- Ecm = 29Gpa
 Steel

- Partial safety factor, s = 1.15 for class I work ……….. (EBCS-2, 1995 on table 3.1),
Page 22
- Yield strength, fyk = 300Mpa
- Design strength
 For steel tension and compression:
f yk 300
f yd    260.87Mpa
s 1.15
- Es=200Mpa

113
f
yk L
a
 0.6 * 300  Le 𝐿𝑒
d   0.4   𝑑 = 0.85 ∗
 400   a 𝛽𝑎
For the Slab
For the Slab
Panel P1
4.8 4.7
P1 2.37
2.4 P1 2.4 2.37
4.7
4.57
𝟐 𝒂
𝒂𝒓 = ((𝟐𝒄 + 𝒂) ∗ )
𝟑 (𝒂 + 𝒄)
𝒂(𝒂−𝒄)
𝒃𝒓 = 𝒃 −
𝒃(𝒂+𝒄)
𝟐 𝟒. 𝟖
𝒂𝒓 = ((𝟐 ∗ 𝟒. 𝟓𝟕 + 𝟒. 𝟖) ∗ ) = 𝟒. 𝟕
𝟑 𝟒. 𝟖 + 𝟒. 𝟓𝟕
𝟒. 𝟖(𝟒. 𝟖 − 𝟒. 𝟓𝟕)
𝒃𝒓 = 𝟐. 𝟒 − = 𝟐. 𝟑𝟕
𝟓(𝟒. 𝟖 + 𝟒. 𝟓𝟕)

114
𝐿𝑦 4.7
𝐿𝑋
1 = 40
2 = 30
𝐿𝑒 2370
𝑑 = 0.85 ∗ = 0.85 ∗ = 𝟔𝟒. 𝟎𝟓 𝐦𝐦
𝐵𝑎 37
Panel P11
3.47
2.24
𝐿𝑦 3.47
= 2.41 = 1.54 < 2 Two way slabLe = 2240
𝐿𝑋
1 = 40
2 = 30
𝐿𝑒 2240
𝑑 = 0.85 ∗ = 0.85 ∗ = 𝟓𝟏. 𝟕𝟗 𝒎𝒎
𝐵𝑎 34.6

115
Summary

Boundary d
Support Ly Lx Depth
Ly/Lx Condition Gover
Panel Condition Type
(mm) (mm) Ba (mm) ning
Id
P5 Interior span 2.8 2.6 1.07 Two - way T-1 44.3 49.88
P6 Interior span 3.47 2.6 1.33 Two - way T-1 41.7 52.99
122.4
C3 End span 17 1.3 13.07 One -Way T-7 10 110.5

116

Assumptions:
 Main Bar = Φ12
For Slab
d= 122.4 mm
D= 122.4 + ф/2 + cover
D= 124.4 + 12 /2 + 15 = 145.4 mm
dused = 150mm − 12/2mm − 15mm = 129 mm
Loading
Dead load

117
Only P1, P3, P4, P6, P7,P10, C1,C3 have Partition Wall
Table 15 Partition wall loads on the slab

P-1 11.139 0.15 3.45 5.7 14 3.707379
P-3 8.36 0.15 3.45 2.83 14 2.452554
P-4 8.36 0.15 3.45 2.83 14 2.452554
P-6 9.02 0.15 3.45 3.87 14 3.108442
P-7 9.02 0.15 3.45 3.87 14 3.108442
P-10 7.77 0.15 3.45 2.35 14 2.191216
C-1 18.205 0.15 3.45 2.7 14 1.074512
C-3 22.1 0.15 3.45 2.6 14 0.887
𝑃
𝐸
3.7/18.98 *100=19<=20% use the Coefficient method

 P-1= 3.7+4.96 = 8.66 KN/m2  P-9 = 4.96 KN/m2
 P-2= 4.96 KN/m2  P-10= 4.96+2.19=7.15 KN/m2
 P-3= 2.45+ 4.96 = 7.41 KN/m2  P-11 = 4.96 KN/m2
 P-4= 2.45+ 4.96 = 7.41 KN/m2  C-1 = 1.07+4.96 = 6.03KN/m2
 P-5= 4.96 KN/m2  C-2= 4.96 KN/m2
 P-6= 3.1 + 4.96 = 8.06 KN/m2  C-3 = 0.887 + 4.96 = 5.847 KN/m2
 P-7= 3.1 + 4.96 = 8.06 KN/m2
 P-8= 4.96 KN/m2

118
Live load
Category A= 2KN/m2 For Bedroom
Category A = 4 KN/m2 For Balconies
Design Load Pd
 P-1= 14.691KN/m2  P-7= 13.88KN/m2
 P-2= 9.696KN/m2  P-8= 9.696KN/m2
 P-3= 13.00KN/m2  P-9= 9.696 KN/m2

P-4=13.00KN/m2  P-10 = 12.65KN/m2
 P-5= 9.696KN/m2  P-11= 9.696KN/m2
 P-6= 13.88KN/m2  C-1 = 14.14 KN/m2
 C-3 = 13.89KN/m2  C-2 = 12.696KN/m2

119

Mi=α*ρd*Lx2
P-1 T-4 2.37 4.7 1.9 14.691 0.091 0.068 0.047 0.036 7.51 5.61 3.88 2.97
P-2 T-3 2.4 2.8 1.16 9.696 0.053 0.04 0.039 0.03 2.96 2.23 2.18 1.68
P-3 T-3 2.4 3.47 1.44 13 0.07 0.053 0.039 0.03 5.24 3.97 2.92 2.25
P-4 T-4 2.41 3.47 1.43 13 0.075 0.056 0.047 0.036 5.66 4.23 3.55 2.72
P-5 T-1 2.6 2.8 1.07 9.696 0.036 0.027 0.032 0.024 2.36 1.77 2.1 1.57
P-6 T-1 2.6 3.47 1.33 13.88 0.047 0.036 0.032 0.024 4.41 3.38 3 2.25
P-7 T-4 2.6 3.47 1.33 13.88 0.071 0.052 0.047 0.036 6.66 4.88 4.41 3.38
P-8 T-4 2.2 4.3 1.95 9.696 0.093 0.069 0.047 0.036 4.36 3.24 2.21 1.69
P-9 T-3 2.24 2.8 1.25 9.696 0.059 0.044 0.039 0.03 2.87 2.14 1.9 1.46
P-10 T-3 2.24 3.47 1.54 12.65 0.074 0.056 0.039 0.03 4.7 3.55 2.48 1.9
P-11 T-4 2.41 3.47 1.43 9.696 0.075 0.056 0.047 0.036 4.22 3.15 2.65 2.03
C-1 T-7 1.1 16.6 15 14.14 0.098 - - - 1.68 - - -
C-2 T-7 1.44 9.54 6.63 12.696 0.098 - - - 2.58 - - -
C-3 T-7 1.3 17 13.1 13.89 0.098 - - - 2.3 - - -

120
o Mxs=α*Xs*Pd*Lx2
o Mys=α*Ys*Pd*Lx2
o Mxf=α*Xf*Pd*Lx2
o Mys=α*Yf*Pd*Lx2
3.6.2. Moment adjustments
for the design
5.19 3.2 3.87 3.87
2.81
3.01 Stair
2.64

121
1. For panel P-1
Between P-1 and P-2
o Δm= 5.06 – 3.18= 1.88

o Δm/M larger = 1.88/5.06*100= 37.15%>20%; we need moment adjustment
o Dfs1=1/Lx1/(1/Lx1+1/Lx2) =1/2.81/(1/2.81+1/2.81) =0.5
o Dfs2=1-0.5 = 0.5
o For P-1, MX3= 5.06-(1.88* 0.5) = 4.12
o P-2= 3.18+ (1.88*0.5) = 4.12
2. For panel P-2
Between P-2 and P-3
o Δm= 3.93 – 3.18 = 0.75

o Δm/M larger= 0.75/3.93*100 = 19%<20%; no need for adjustment take the average
o (3.93+ 3.18)/2= 3.55
Between P2 and P5
o Δm= 4.33 – 3.45=0.88

o Δm/M larger= 0.88/4.33*100 = 20.32 >20%; we need moment adjustment
o Dfs1=1/Lx2/(1/Lx2+1/Lx5) =1/2.81/(1/2.81+1/3.01) =0.68
o Dfs2=1-0.68 = 0.32
o For P-1, MX3= 4.33 -(0.88* 0.68) = 3.73
o P-2= 3.45+ (0.88*0.32) = 3.73
3. For panel P-3
Between P-3 and P-4
o Δm= 4.77 – 3.93 = 0.84

o Δm/M larger= 0.84/4.77*100= 17.6%<20%; no need for adjustment take the average
4.77+3.93
o ( ) = 𝟒. 𝟑𝟓
2

122
Between P-3 and P-6
o Δm = 7.05 – 5.84 = 1.21

o Δm/M larger= 1.21/7.05*100= 17.16%<20%; no need for adjustment take the average
7.05+5.84
o ( ) = 𝟔. 𝟒𝟒
2
4. For panel P-4
Between P-4 and P-7
o Δm=8.82 – 7.62=1.2
o Δm/M larger= 1.2/8.82*100 = 13.6<20%; no need for adjustment take the average
8.82+7.62
o ( ) = 𝟖. 𝟐𝟐
2
5. For panel P-5
Between P-5 and P-6
o Δm=3.97-3.07=0.9
o Δm/M larger=0.9/3.97*100 = 22.67>20%; we need moment adjustment
o Dfs1=1/Lx5/(1/Lx5+1/Lx6) =1/3.01/(1/3.01+1/3.01) =0.5
o Dfs2=1-0.5 = 0.5
o For P-1, MX3= 3.97-(0.9* 0.5) = 3.52
o P-2= 3.07+ (0.9*0.5) = 3.52
Between P-5 and P-9

o Δm= 4.2 - 3.45= 0.75
o Δm/M larger= 0.75/4.2*(100) = 17.85%<20; no need for adjustment take the average
4.2+3.45
o ( ) = 𝟑. 𝟖𝟐𝟓
2

123
6. For panel P-6
Between P-6 and P-7
o Δm= 5.84 – 3.97=1.87

o Δm/M larger=1.87/5.84*100 = 32.02%>20%; it needs adjustment
o Dfs5=1/Lx6/ (1/Lx6+1/Lx7) =1/3.01/ (1/3.01+1/3.01) = 0.5
o Dfs6= 1- 0.5 = 0.5
o For P-6; Mxs= 5.84 - (1.87 * 0.5) = 4.905
o P-7; Mxs= 3.97 + (1.87 * 0.5) = 4.905
Between P6 and P10
o Δm = 5.84 – 4.15 = 1.69

o Δm/M larger= 1.69/5.84*100= 28.9%>20%; it needs adjustment
o Dfs5=1/Lx6/ (1/Lx6+1/Lx10) =1/3.01/ (1/3.01+1/2.64) = 0.46
o Dfs6= 1- 0.46 = 0.54
o For P-6; Mxs= 5.84 - (1.69 * 0.46) = 5.06
o P-7; Mxs= 4.15 + (1.69 * 0.54) = 5.06
7. For panel P-7
o Δm= 8.8 – 4.87 = 3.93

o Δm/M larger= 3.93/8.8*100 = 44.65>20% it needs adjustment
o Dfs5=1/Lx7/ (1/Lx7+1/Lx11) =1/3.01/ (1/3.01+1/2.64) = 0.46
o Dfs6= 1- 0.46 = 0.54
o For P-6; Mxs= 8.8 - (3.93 * 0.46) = 6.99
o P-7; Mxs= 3.93 + (3.93 * 0.54) = 6.99

124
8. For panel P-8
Between P-8 and P-9
15. Δm= 3.23 – 2.78= 0.45

o Δm/M larger= 0.45/3.23*100 = 13.9<20% it needs adjustment
o Dfs8=1/Lx8/ (1/Lx8+1/Lx9) =1/2.64/ (1/2.64+1/2.64) = 0.5
o Dfs9 = 1- 0.5 = 0.5
o For P-6; Mxs= 3.23 -(0.45 * 0.5) = 3.005
o P-7; Mxs= 2.78+ (0.45 * 0.5) = 3.005
9. For panel P-9
 Δm= 2.78 – 2.19= 0.59

o Δm/M larger= 0.59/2.78*100 = 21.2>20% it needs adjustment
o Dfs8 =1/Lx9/ (1/Lx9+1/Lx10) =1/2.64/ (1/2.64+1/2.64) = 0.5
o Dfs9 = 1- 0.5 = 0.5
o For P-6; Mxs= 2.78 - (0.59 * 0.5) = 2.48
o P-7; Mxs= 2.19 + (0.59 * 0.5) = 2.48
10. For panel P-10

 Δm= 3.05 – 2.19 = 0.86

o Δm/M larger= 0.86/3.05*100 = 28.19 >20% it needs adjustment
o Dfs10 =1/Lx10/ (1/Lx10+1/Lx11) =1/2.64/ (1/2.64+1/2.64) = 0.5
o Dfs11 = 1- 0.5 = 0.5
o For P-10; Mxs= 3.05 - (0.86 * 0.5) = 2.62
o P-11; Mxs= 2.19+(0.86 * 0.5) = 2.62

125
Mxs = 9.809 Mxs = 7.05
Mxs = 4.35 Mxs = 7.62
Mys = 4.77 Mys = 3.056
Between P-7 and C-2
Mys = 5.84

Between P-8 and C-3
Mxs = 6.389
Between P-9 and C-3
Mxs = 4.2
Between P-10 and C-3
Mxs = 4.15
Between P-11 and C-3
Mxs = 4.87

126
3.6.3. Moment adjustments
There are two cases
for the design
14. For panel P-1

Between P-1 and P-2
Mlarge = Msmall/Mlarge *100% > 20%
 3.88 - 2.18/3.88*100 > 20%

 43.8%>20% then to use case two……..
 Madj= Mlarge-KL/KL+Ks* Δm
 KL =large moment slab stiffness
 Ks=small moment slab stiffness
 DF1=kL/kL+ks
 kL=I/L the far end is fixed
 kL=3/4*I/L the far end is pine
 kL = 3/4I/L=3/4*1/5.19=0.144
 Ks= I/L=1/3.2=0.312
 kL+ Ks=0.456
 DF1= kL/ kL+ Ks=0.144/0.456=0.315
 Δm=3.88-2.18= 1.7
 Madj= Mlarge-KL/KL+Ks* Δm
 For P-1, Mys= 3.88-(0.315*1.7)=3.344
 DF2=1-0.315=0.685
 For P-2, Mys=2.18+(0.685*1.7)=3.344

127
2. For panel P-2

Between P-2 and P-3
 2.91-2.18/2.19*100>20%=25.1%>20,then to use case of moment distribution
 kL= I/L=1/3.87=0.258
 Ks= I/L=1/3.2=0.312
 kL+ Ks=0.258+0.312=0.57
 Δm= Mlarge-Msmall=2.92-2.18=0.74
 DF1= kL/ kL+ Ks=0.258/0.57=0.453
 Madj= Mlarge-( DF1* Δm)=2.92-(0.453*0.74)=2.585
 For P-2, Mys=2.92-(0.453*0.74)=2.585
 DF2=1-0.453=0.547
 For P-3, Mys=2.18+(0.547*0.74)= 2.585
3. For panel P-3

Between P-3 and P-4
 3.55-2.92/3.55*100<20=17.7%<20% in this case the average use
 Madj= Mlarge+ Msmall/2=3.55+2.92/2=3.23
Between P-3 and P-6
 5.24-4.41/5.24*100<20%=15.83%<20% in this case the average use
 Madj= Mlarge+ Msmall/2=5.24+4.41/2=4.825
4. For panel P-4

Between P-4 and P-7
 6.66-5.66/6.66*100<20%=15%<20% in this case the average use
 Madj= Mlarge+ Msmall/2=6.66+5.66=6.16

128
5. For panel P-5

Between P-5 and P-6
 3-2.1*100>20%=30%>20% then to use case of moment distribution
 kL= I/L=1/3.87=0.258
 Ks= I/L=1/3.2=0.312
 kL+ Ks=0.258+0.312=0.57
 Δm= Mlarge-Msmall=3-2.1=0.9
 DF1= kL/ kL+ Ks=0.258/0.57=0.453
 Madj= Mlarge-( DF1* Δm)=3-(0.453*0.9)=2.59
 For P-5, Mys=3-(0.453*0.9)=2.59
 DF2=1-0.453=0.547
 For P-6, Mys=2.1+(0.547*0.9)= 2.59
Between P-5 and P-9
 2.87-2.36/2.87*100<20%-=17.7%<20% in this case the average use

 Madj= Mlarge+ Msmall/2=2.87+2
6. For panel P-6
Between P-6 and P-7
 4.41-3/4.41*100>20%=31.9>20 then to use case of moment distribution

 kL= I/L=1/3.87=0.258
 Ks= I/L=1/3.87=0.258
 kL+ Ks=0.258+0.258=0.516
 Δm= Mlarge-Msmall=4.41-3=1.41
 DF1= kL/ kL+ Ks=0.258/0.516=0.5
 Madj= Mlarge-( DF1* Δm)=4.41-(0.5*1.41)=3.705
 For P-5, Mys=4.41-(0.5*1.41)=3.705
 DF2=1-0.5=0.5
 For P-7=4.41-(0.5*1.41)= 3.705

129
Between P6 and P10

 4.7+4.41/2=4.55
7.For panel P-7
 6.66-4.22/6.66*100>20%=36.6%>20 then to use case of moment distribution
 kL= I/L=1/3.02=0.331
 Ks= I/L=1/2.64=0.379
 kL+ Ks=0.331+0.379=0.709
 DF1= kL/ kL+ Ks=0.331/0.709=0.467
 Madj= Mlarge-( DF1* Δm)=6.66-(0.467*2.44)=5.53
 For P-7 For , Mxs=6.66-(0.467*2.44)=5.53
 DF2=1-0.467=0.533
 For P-11=4.22+(0.533*2.44)= 5.53
8.For panel P-8
Between P-8 and P-9
 Madj=2.24+1.9/2=2.07
9.For panel P-9
 2.48-1.9/2.48*100>20%=23.3%>20% then to use case of moment distribution
 kL= I/L=1/3.87=0.258
 Ks= I/L=1/3.2=0.312
 kL+ Ks=0.571
 DF1= kL/ kL+ Ks=0.45
 Madj= Mlarge-( DF1* Δm)=2.48-(0.45*0.58)=2.22
 For P-9 For , Mys=2.48-(0.45*0.58)= 2.22
 DF2=1-0.45=0.55
 For P-10=1.9+(0.55*0.58)= 2.22

130
10. For panel P-10


 Madj=2.65+2.,48/2=2.57
11.For C1 (Cantilever 1)
 Between P-1 and C-1, Mxs=7.51
 Between P-2 and C-1, Mxs 2.96
 Between P-4 and C-1 Mxs=5.66
 Between P-4 and C-2 Mys=3.55

13.For C3 (Cantilever 3)
 Between P-8 and C-3, Mxs= 4.36


131
A. For Span P
Madj = 3.344KNM
Δm = 5.61-3.344 = 2.266KNM
Determine CxAnd Cy
𝐿𝑦/𝐿𝑥 = 4.7/2.37 = 1.9 Cx = 0.258, Cy = 0.06
Mxd=5.61 + (0.258 ∗ 2.266) = 6.19𝐾𝑁
Myd=2.97+(0.06*2.266)=3.11KN
B. For P-2

So we don’t need to do For Both P2 & P1 AndP2&P3
Only we Adjust for this P2 & P5
For P2 & P5
Madj = 2.66KNM
Δm=2.96-2.66=0.3KNM
Determine CxAnd Cy
𝐿𝑦 2.8
= = 1.16 Cx = 0.332, Cy = 0.368
𝐿𝑥 2.4
Mxd=2.23+(0.332*0.3)=2.33KNM
Myd=1.68+(0.368*0.3)=1.79

132
C. For P-3
So we need to do for Both P3 & P2 and P3 & P6
 For P3 & P2
Madj=2.585
Δm1=2.92-2.585=0.335knm
Determine CxAnd Cy
𝐿𝑥 3.87
= = 1.44 Cx1 =0.311 , Cy1 = 0.104
𝐿𝑦 2.81
Mxd=3.97+0.311*0.335=0.104knm=2.25+0104*0.335=2.285knm
 For P3 & P6
Md = 4.825
Δm= 5.24 – 4.825= 0.415KNm
Determine CxAnd Cy
Cx = 0.407
Cy = 0.323
So:-
Mxd = 5.34 + 0.311 * 0.38 + 0.407 * 0.61
Mxd =5.7KNm
Myd = 3.02+ 0.104 * 0.38 +0.323 * 0.61
Myd = 3.25KNm

133
D. For P-4
 For P4 & P3
Md = 3.23KNm
Δm = 4.77 – 4.35 = 0.42KNm
Determine Cx And Cy
𝐿𝑥 3.87
= = 1.44Cx= 0.311 , Cy = 0.104
𝐿𝑦 2.81
Mxd = 5.69 + (0.311 * 0.42)

= 5.82KNm
Myd = 3.65 + (0.104 * 0.42)
= 3.69KNm
E. For P-5
 No need for Span Adjustment
F. For P-6
 For P6& P5
Md = 3.52KNm
Δm1 = 3.97 – 3.52 = 0.45KNm
Determine CxAnd Cy from Ebcs 2 Table – A2
𝐿𝑥 3.2
= = 1.06 Cx1 =0.366 , Cy1 = 0.244
𝐿𝑦 3.01
 For P6 & P10

Md = 5.06KNm
Δm2 = 5.84 – 5.06 = 0.78KNm
Determine Cx And Cy
Cx2 = 0.3
Cy2 = 0.376
So:-

134
Mxd = 4.47 + 0.366 * 0.45 + 0.3 * 0.78

Mxd = 4.86KNm
Myd = 2.98 + 0.244 * 0.45 +0.376 * 0.78
Myd =3.38KNm
G. For P-7
So we need to do for Both P7 & P4, P7& P6 And P7&P11
 For P7 & P4
Md = 8.22KNm
Δm1 = 8.82 – 8.22 = 0.6KNm
𝐿𝑦 3.87
= = 1.37 Cx1 = 0.49, Cy1 = 0.337
𝐿𝑥 2.81
 For P7& P6
Md = 4.905KNm
Δm2 = 5.85 – 4.905 = 0.945KNm
Determine Cx And Cy
Cx2 = 0.318
Cy2 = 0.11
 For P7 & P11
Md = 6.99KNm
Δm3= 8.82 – 6.99 = 1.83KNm
Determine CxAnd Cy
Cx3 = 0.49
Cy3 = 0.337
Myd = Myf + Cy1 * Δm1 + Cy2 * Δm2+Cy3*Δm3
Mxd = Mxf + Cx1 * Δm1 + Cx2 * Δm2+Cx3*Δm3
Mxd = 6.46 + 0.49 * 0.6 + 0.318 * 0.945+0.49*1.83
Mxd =7.95KNm
Myd = 4.47+ 0.337 * 0.6 + 0.11 * 0.945 + 0.337*1.83
Myd = 5.39KNm

135
H. For P-8
 For P8& P9
Md = 3.005KNm
Δm = 3.23 – 3.005 = 0.225KNm
𝐿𝑥 5.19
= = 1.95Cx= 0.248 , Cy = 0.057
𝐿𝑦 2.64
Mxd = 4.74+ (0.248 * 0.225)

= 4.79KNm
Myd = 2.47 + (0.057 * 0.225)
= 2.48KNm
I. For P9
For P9& P5
Md = 3.825KNm
Δm1 = 4.2 – 3.825 = 0.375KNm
𝐿𝑦 3.2
= = 1.2 Cx1 =0.344 , Cy1 = 0.364
𝐿𝑥 2.64
For P9& P10

Md = 2.48KNm
Δm2 = 2.78 – 2.48 = 0.3KNm
Determine CxAnd Cy
Cx2 = 0.338
Cy2 = 0.172

136
Mxd = 3.13 + 0.344 * 0.375 + 0.364 * 0.3

Mxd = 3.36KNm
Myd = 2.13 + 0.364 * 0.375 +0.172 * 0.3
Myd =2.31KNm
J. For P10
K. For P-11
 For P11& P10

Md = 2.62KNm
Δm = 3.05 – 2.62 = 0.43KNm
𝐿𝑦 3.87
= = 1.43Cx=0.312 , Cy = 0.105
𝐿𝑥 2.64
Mxd = 3.64 + (0.312 * 0.43)
= 3.774KNm
Myd = 2.34 + (0.105* 0.43)
= 2.38KNm

137
Chapter Four
4. Stair Case Design
4.1. Introduction
Figure 7 Dog leg stair case
Staircase is an important part of building which is constructed to provide ready, easy,

comfortable and safe ascent/descent with series of steps that are neither laborious nor difficult to
climb within an enclosure called stairwell (staircase). It is oftentimes the only means of access
between the various floors in the building. Stairs could be made from timber, bricks, stone, metal
and reinforced cement concrete. It is also provided with finishing of marble, tiles, plaster and
etcetera. There are various types of stairs which are classified as straight stair, quarter turn stair,
half turn stair, three-quarter stair and bifurcating stair. The type of stair to be designed according
to the architectural drawing is half turn stair which is known as open newel half turn stair.
According to the architectural drawing there are two stair cases in different places in which case
we have analyzed the stairs according to their positions and end conditions. Here under are given
the properties of the materials we have used.

138
Material Property
 fyk = 400MPa, fcu= 25MPa
 fyd= 400/1.15 = 347.83MPa
 fck= 0.8 * 25= 20MPa
 fcd= (0.85*20)/1.5 = 11.33MPa
 Reinforcement bar size= 14mm, as=153.94mm2
 Reinforcement bar size= 8mm, as=50.3mm2
4.2. The stair case modeling and analysis

There are one dog legged stair type on all floor.
Assume the stair flying from the basement floor to landing between the basement and ground
floor is stair-1 and the other stairs is stair-2.
10*150/280
Stair-2
1.0m 2.82m 1.40m
Stair - 1
2.82m 1.40m
Figure 8 Stair Case plan and elevation view

139
4.3. Design of Stair - One (first flight from basement)
2.82 m 1.4 m
Figure 4.2 Stair case one

Design data
 Tread (T) = 280 mm and number of trade = 10

 Number of riser = R=T+1=10+1=11
 Rise r (R) =150 mm
150
θ = tan(−1) = 28⁰
280
b = √1502 + 2802 = 319.6 mm
Material properties:
Concrete = C25 and Steel = S300 with class-I workmanship

Clear cover = 15mm

140
Design strength of materials (Steel and Concrete):
 Concrete
 fcu = 25MPa
 fck = 0.8 ∗ fcu = 20MPa
0.85fck 0.85(20MPa)
 fcd = = = 11.33MPa,
Υc 1.5
fck 2/3 (20)2/3

 fctd = 0.21 = 0.21 = 1.03MPa
Υc 1.5
 Steel
 fyk = 300 Mpa
𝑓𝑦𝑘 300𝑀𝑝𝑎
 𝑓𝑦𝑑 = = = 260.87𝑁/𝑚𝑚2
𝛾𝑠 1.15
Geometry/minimum depth determination
𝐿𝑦 2.82 + 1.40
= = 3.01 > 2
𝐿𝑥 1.40
Therefore, the stair is designed as one way slab, taking unit width strip in the larger span
direction or direction of flight.
serviceability limit state as an initial depth and check that depth for shear and flexure
yk f L
d ≥ (0.4 + 0.6 400 ) βe , leff = effective length = 3000 mm
a
𝛽𝑎 = 𝑐𝑜𝑛𝑠𝑡𝑎𝑛𝑡 𝑤ℎ𝑖𝑐ℎ 𝑖𝑠 𝑏𝑎𝑠𝑒𝑑 𝑜𝑛 𝑠𝑢𝑝𝑝𝑜𝑟𝑡 𝑐𝑜𝑛𝑑𝑖𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛 . 𝑓𝑟𝑜𝑚 𝐸𝐵𝐶𝑆 − 2/1995

𝐿𝑒 𝐿𝑒
𝑑 = (0.4 + 0.6(300⁄400)) ∗ = 0.85 ∗
𝛽𝑎 𝛽𝑎
βa = 20 For one way simple supported Beam
3000
𝑑 = 0.85 ∗ = 127.5
20

141
Determination of gross depth

𝐷 = 𝑑 + 𝑐𝑜𝑣𝑒𝑟 + ∅/2 = 127.5 + 15𝑚𝑚 + 12/2 = 148.5 𝑚𝑚
𝑢𝑠𝑒 𝐷 = 150 𝑚𝑚
𝑑𝑢𝑠𝑒𝑑 = 150 𝑚𝑚 − 15𝑚𝑚 − 6𝑚𝑚 = 129 𝑚𝑚
Loading and load determination

Live load
As per EBCS-1, 1995, Table 2.9 and 2.10 on page 45 and 46. Live load for staircase is tabulated
below.
Function Category LL (KN/m2) LL (KN/m)
Stair case A 3 3*1m= 3
Dead load
Flight/inclined part of stair
o Plaster/Stair is plastered on the bottom side of (soffit) on the upper side we use marble as
finishing material.
0.150∗25∗1
 Self-weight of bottom flight = = 4.25KN/m
(COS 280 )
KN
t∗1.2∗Υ 0.02∗23 ∗1m
m3
 weight of plaster = = = 0.52 KN/m
cosϴ (COS 280 )
27 KN
 weight of marble = t ∗ Υ ∗ 1m = 0.02 ∗ ∗ 1m = 0.54 KN/m
m3
23KN
 weight of cement screed = t ∗ Υ ∗ 1m = 0.02 ∗ ∗ 1m = 0.46 KN/m
m3
 Dead load of steps

28 cm
15 cm
Dead load of step = ½(0.15m ∗ 0.28 ∗ 1m) ∗ 25 ∗ 10 = 5.25 KN/m

142
Finishing (marble and cement screed) on the riser:

The weight of marble and cement screed vertically placed on the riser side is a concentrated load,
but the effect is assumed to be uniformly distributed on the whole flight.
𝑟
w = t ∗ 𝛶 ∗ ℎ𝑟 ∗
𝑓𝑙𝑖𝑔ℎ𝑡 𝑠𝑝𝑎𝑛
Where: t = thickness of the material
hr = height of the riser
r = number of riser on one flight
23KN 11
Weight of cement screed = 0.02m ∗ 3
∗ 0.15m ∗ = 0.253 KN/m
m 3m
27KN 11
weight of marble = 0.03mm ∗ 3
∗ 0.15m ∗ = 0.445/m
m 3m
 Total Dead load From Flight

= 4.25 +5.25 +0.54 +0.46 + 1.875 + 0.253 + 0.445 = 13.07 KN/m
Load Combination
Pd=1.35 DL +1.5 LL = 1.35*13.07 + 1.5*3 = 22.14 KN/m
From Landing
Floor Finishing (20 mm)
Cement Screed (20 mm)
Concrete (150 mm)
Plastering (20 mm)
Figure 9 landing cross section 1

143
 Self-weight = 0.15 ∗ 25KN/m³ ∗ 1m = 3.75 KN/m

 weight of plaster = 0.02 ∗ 23 KN/m³ ∗ 1m = 0.46 KN/m
 weight of marble = t ∗ Υ ∗ 1m = 0.02 ∗ 27KN/m³ ∗ 1m = 0.54 KN/m
 weightofcementscreed = t ∗ 1.2 ∗ Υ = 0.02 ∗ 23 KN/m³ = 0.46KN/m
 Total Dead load From Landing = 3.75 + 0.46 + 0.54 + 0.46 = 5.21 KN/m
Load Combination
Pd=1.35 DL +1.5 LL = 1.35*5.21+1.5*3 = 11.53 KN/m
Analysis of stair case one
ETABS Input
A 2.82m 1.40 m B
Sap Output
B
A
4.22m
Shear force diagram
B
A
Bending moment diagram

Figure 4.2 Loading, Shear force and bending moment diagram for Stair-Case-1
From the above figure for shear force and bending moment:
Mmax = 27.52 KN. m

144
 Check depth for flexure (Ultimate limit state)
Mmax
d=√
0.8 b fyd ρm (1 − 0.4 ρm)
Where:
 b = 1000mm
 fcd = 11.33 Mpa
 fyd = 260.87 Mp = 0.015
 m = 28.78
 C1 = 0.0869
 C2 = 3003.04
 𝜌𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 0.00167
 𝜌𝑚𝑎𝑥 = 0.75 𝜌𝑏 = 0.019
1 4∗𝑀
 𝜌 = 2 ∗ (𝐶1 − √𝐶1 2 − 𝑏∗𝑑2 ∗𝐶
𝑑
)
2
1 4 ∗ 27.52∗10 6
 𝜌 = 2 ∗ (0.0869 − √0.0869 2 − 1000∗129 2 ∗3003.04) = 0.006

0.00167 < 0.006 < 0.019
27.52 ∗ 106
d=√
0.8 ∗ 1000 ∗ 11.33 ∗ 0.019 ∗ 28.78(1 − 0.4 ∗ 0.019 ∗ 28.78)
d = 95.37 mm < dused = 129mm ----- OK!!

145
 Reinforcement work
Flexural reinforcement design
 b = 1000mm
 dused = 129 mm
0.5 0.5
 𝜌𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 𝑓 = 300 = 0.00167
 m=28.78
 C1 = 0.0869
 C2 = 3003.04
1 4∗𝑀
 𝜌 = 2 ∗ (𝐶1 − √𝐶1 2 − 𝑏∗𝑑2 ∗𝐶
𝑑
)
2
 𝐴𝑠 = 𝜌 ∗ 𝑏 ∗ 𝑑
1 4 ∗ 27.52 ∗10 6
 𝜌 = 2 ∗ (0.0869 − √0.0869 2 − 1000∗129 2 ∗3003.04) = 0.00695
 𝐴𝑠 = 𝜌 ∗ 𝑏 ∗ 𝑑
𝐴𝑠 = 0.00695 ∗ 1000 ∗ 129

𝑨𝒔 = 𝟖𝟗𝟔. 𝟓𝟓𝒎𝒎 ²

𝐴𝑠𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 0.00167 ∗ 1000 ∗ 129
𝑨𝒔𝒎𝒊𝒏 = 𝟐𝟏𝟓. 𝟒𝟑𝒎𝒎 ²

146
𝑏𝑎𝑠
𝑆=
𝐴𝑠
Where:
2D or 350mm
2D = 2 ∗ 200 = 400mm
350mm
Assume ∅ 12 Bar
𝑏𝑎𝑠 1000∗(𝜋∗122 )/4

𝑆= = = 126.08 Use 𝑆 = 120 𝑚𝑚
𝐴𝑠 896.55
𝑷𝒓𝒐𝒗𝒊𝒅𝒆 ∅𝟏𝟐 𝑪/𝑪 𝟏𝟐𝟎 𝒎𝒎

A. Check depth for shear capacity (𝐕𝐂 > 𝐕𝐬𝐝 )
𝑏 = 1𝑚
Where:
 𝐾1 = 1 + 50𝜌 ≤ 2.0
 𝐾2 = 1.6 − 𝑑 ≥ 1 , 𝑑 𝑖𝑛 𝑚.
𝐴𝑠
 𝜌=𝑏
𝑤𝑑
 𝐴𝑠 = area of the tensile reinforcement anchored beyond the intersection of the steel and
the line of a possible 450 crack starting from the edge of the section.(EBCS-2)

147
 𝐴𝑠 = the area of tension reinforcement extending not less than 𝑑 + 𝑙𝑏,𝑛𝑒𝑡 beyond the
section considered.(Euro Code -2)
𝐴𝑠 to be introduced in equation above
If not satisfied the shear strength, revise with new depth. Shear reinforcement is provided for
solid slabs, the concrete shear capacity should resist all design shear force.
𝑉𝑐 = 0.25 ∗ 1.032 ∗ 𝐾1 𝐾2 𝑏𝑑
𝐾1 = 1 + 50𝜌 ≤ 2.0
774
𝐾1 = 1 + 50 ∗ 𝜌 = 1 + 50 ∗ = 1.3
1000 ∗ 129
𝐾2 = 1.6 − 𝑑 ≥ 1
𝐾2 = 1.6 − 0.129 = 1.471
𝑉𝑐 = 0.25 ∗ 1.032 ∗ 1.3 ∗ 1.471 ∗ 1 ∗ 129 = 63.64 𝐾𝑁 > 𝑉𝑚𝑎𝑥

= 𝟐𝟔. 𝟗𝟑 𝑲𝑵 … … . . 𝐍𝐢𝐜𝐞 !
So, the depth provided is adequate for both flexure and shear.

148
4.4. Design of Stair - Two (Second flight and above)
1.0 m 2.82 m 1.40 m
Figure 10 Stair case Two
 Geometry/minimum depth determination
𝐿𝑦 1 + 2.82 + 1.40
= = 3.72 > 2
𝐿𝑥 1.4
Therefore, the stair is designed as one way slab, taking unit width strip in the larger span
direction or direction of flight.
serviceability limit state as an initial depth and check that depth for shear and flexure
yk f L
d ≥ (0.4 + 0.6 400 ) βe , leff = effective length = 3000 mm
a
𝛽𝑎 = constant which is based on support condition . from EBCS − 2/1995

Le Le
d = (0.4 + 0.6(300⁄400)) ∗ = 0.85 ∗
βa βa
βa = 24 For one way End Span Beam
3000
𝑑 = 0.85 ∗ = 106.25
24

149
Determination of gross depth

D = d + cover + ∅/2 = 106.25 + 15mm + 12/2 = 127.25 mm
use D = 130 mm
dused = 130 mm − 15mm − 6mm = 109 mm
 Loading and load determination

Live load
As per EBCS-1, 1995, Table 2.9 and 2.10 on page 45 and 46. Live load for staircase is tabulated
below.
Function Category LL (KN/m2) LL (KN/m)
Stair case A 3 3*1m= 3
Dead load
Flight/inclined part of stair
o Plaster/Stair is plastered on the bottom side of (soffit) on the upper side we use marble as
finishing material.
0.130∗25∗1
 Self-weight of bottom flight = = 3.68KN/m
(COS 280 )
KN
t∗1.2∗Υ 0.02∗23 ∗1𝑚
m3
 weight of plaster = = = 0.52KN/m
cosϴ (COS 280 )
27 KN
 weight of marble = t ∗ Υ ∗ 1m = 0.02 ∗ ∗ 1m = 0.54 KN/m
m3
23KN
 weight of cement screed = t ∗ Υ ∗ 1m = 0.02 ∗ ∗ 1m = 0.46 KN/m
m3
 Dead load of steps

28 cm
15 cm
KN
Dead load of step = ½ (0.15m ∗ 25 m3 ∗ 1m) ∗ 10 = 18.8 KN/m

150
Finishing (marble and cement screed) on the riser:

The weight of marble and cement screed vertically placed on the riser side is a concentrated load,
but the effect is assumed to be uniformly distributed on the whole flight.
𝑟
w = t ∗ 𝛶 ∗ ℎ𝑟 ∗
𝑓𝑙𝑖𝑔ℎ𝑡 𝑠𝑝𝑎𝑛
Where: t = thickness of the material
hr = height of the riser
r = number of riser on one flight
23𝐾𝑁 11
Weight of cement screed = 0.02m ∗ 3
∗ 0.15m ∗ = 𝟎. 𝟐𝟓𝟑 𝐊𝐍/𝐦
𝑚 3𝑚
𝟐𝟕𝑲𝑵 𝟏𝟏
𝐰𝐞𝐢𝐠𝐡𝐭 𝐨𝐟 𝐦𝐚𝐫𝐛𝐥𝐞 = 𝟎. 𝟎𝟑𝐦𝐦 ∗ 𝟑
∗ 𝟎. 𝟏𝟓𝐦 ∗ = 𝟎. 𝟒𝟒𝟓𝐊𝐍/𝐦
𝒎 𝟑𝒎
 Total Dead load From Flight
= 3.68 +0.52 +0.54 +0.46 + 18.8 + 0.253+0.445 = 24.69 KN/m
Load Combination
Pd=1.35 DL +1.5 LL = 1.35*24.69 + 1.5*3 = 37.83 KN/m
From Landing
Floor Finishing (20 mm)
Cement Screed (20 mm)
Concrete (130 mm)
Plastering (20 mm)
Figure 11 Cross section for landing 2

151
 Self-weight = 0.130 ∗ 25KN/m³ ∗ 1m = 3.25 KN/m

 weight of plaster = 0.02 ∗ 23 KN/m³ ∗ 1m = 0.46 KN/m
 weight of marble = t ∗ Υ ∗ 1m = 0.02 ∗ 27KN/m³ ∗ 1m = 0.54 KN/m
 weightofcementscreed = t ∗ 1.2 ∗ Υ = 0.02 ∗ 23 KN/m³ = 0.46KN/m
Total Dead load From Landing = 3.25 + 0.46 + 0.54 + 0.46 = 4.71 KN/m
Load Combination
 Pd=1.35 DL +1.5 LL = 1.35*6.46+1.5*3 = 10.85 KN/m
 Analysis of stair case two
ETABS Input
A
B
1.0 m 2.82 m 1.40 m
ETABS Output
A 5.22 m B
Shear force diagram
50.03
A 29.15 B
Bending Moment diagram

Figure 4.8 Loading, Shear force and bending moment diagram for Stair-Case-2

152
From the above figure for shear force and bending moment:
𝐌𝐒𝐮𝐩𝐩𝐨𝐫𝐭 = 𝟓𝟎. 𝟎𝟑 𝐊𝐍. 𝐦 𝐌𝐬𝐩𝐚𝐧 = 𝟐𝟗. 𝟏𝟓 𝐊𝐍. 𝐦
 Check depth for flexure (Ultimate limit state) for stair 2
Mmax
d=√
0.8 b fyd ρm (1 − 0.4 ρm)
Where:
 b = 1000mm
 fcd = 11.33 Mpa
 fyd = 260.87 Mp = 0.015
 m = 28.78
 C1 = 0.0869
 C2 = 3003.04
 𝜌𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 0.00167
 𝜌𝑚𝑎𝑥 = 0.75 𝜌𝑏 = 0.019
1 4∗𝑀
 𝜌 = 2 ∗ (𝐶1 − √𝐶1 2 − 𝑏∗𝑑2 ∗𝐶
𝑑
)
2
1 4 ∗ 50.03∗10 6
 𝜌 = 2 ∗ (0.0869 − √0.0869 2 − 1000∗109 2 ∗3003.04) = 0.021

0.021 > 0.019
50.03 ∗ 106
d=√
0.8 ∗ 1000 ∗ 11.33 ∗ 0.019 ∗ 28.78(1 − 0.4 ∗ 0.019 ∗ 28.78)
𝐝 = 𝟏𝟎𝟐. 𝟒𝟖 𝐦𝐦 < 𝐝𝐮𝐬𝐞𝐝 = 𝟏𝟎𝟗𝐦𝐦 ----- Nice!!

153
 Reinforcement Work
Flexural reinforcement design

i. Design for Support moment
 MSupport = 50.03 KN. m

 𝐴𝑠 = 𝜌 ∗ 𝑏 ∗ 𝑑
1 4 ∗ 50.03∗10 6
 𝜌 = 2 ∗ (0.0869 − √0.0869 2 − 1000∗109 2 ∗3003.04) = 0.021
𝐴𝑠 = 0.019 ∗ 1000 ∗ 109

𝑨𝒔 = 𝟐𝟎𝟕𝟏𝒎𝒎 ²

𝐴𝑠𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 0.00167 ∗ 1000 ∗ 109
𝑨𝒔𝒎𝒊𝒏 = 𝟏𝟖𝟐. 𝟎𝟑 𝒎𝒎 ²
𝑏𝑎𝑠
𝑆=
𝐴𝑠
Where:
2D or 350mm
2D = 2 ∗ 130 = 260mm
350mm

154
Assume ∅ 12 Bar
𝑏𝑎𝑠 1000∗(𝜋∗122 )/4

𝑆= = = 54.6 Use 𝑆 = 50 𝑚𝑚
𝐴𝑠 2070
𝑷𝒓𝒐𝒗𝒊𝒅𝒆 ∅𝟏𝟐 𝑪/𝑪 𝟓𝟎𝒎𝒎

ii. Design for Span moment
 MSpan = 29.15 KN. m
 𝐴𝑠 = 𝜌 ∗ 𝑏 ∗ 𝑑
1 4 ∗29.15∗10 6
 𝜌 = ∗ (0.0869 − √0.0869 2 − )= 0.0109
2 1000∗109 2 ∗3003.04
𝐴𝑠 = 0.0109 ∗ 1000 ∗ 109

𝑨𝒔 = 𝟏, 𝟏𝟖𝟖. 𝟏 𝒎𝒎 ²

𝐴𝑠𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 0.00167 ∗ 1000 ∗ 109
𝑨𝒔𝒎𝒊𝒏 = 𝟏𝟖𝟐. 𝟎𝟑𝒎𝒎 ²
𝑏𝑎𝑠
𝑆=
𝐴𝑠
Where:
2D or 350mm
2D = 2 ∗ 130 = 260mm
350mm
Assume ∅ 12 Bar
𝑏𝑎𝑠 1000∗(𝜋∗122 )/4

𝑆= = = 44.58 Use 𝑆 = 95.14 𝑚𝑚
𝐴𝑠 1188.1
𝑷𝒓𝒐𝒗𝒊𝒅𝒆 ∅𝟏𝟐 𝑪/𝑪 𝟗𝟎 𝒎𝒎

155
 Check depth for shear capacity (𝐕𝐂 > 𝐕𝐬𝐝 )
𝑏 = 1𝑚
Where:
 𝐾1 = 1 + 50𝜌 ≤ 2.0
2071
 𝐾1 = 1 + 50 ∗ 𝜌 = 1 + 50 ∗ 1000∗109 = 1.95
 𝐾2 = 1.6 − 𝑑 ≥ 1
 𝐾2 = 1.6 − 0.109 = 1.491
𝑉𝑐 = 0.25 ∗ 1.032 ∗ 1.95 ∗ 1.491 ∗ 1 ∗ 109 = 81.76 𝐾𝑁 > 𝑉𝑚𝑎𝑥

= 38 𝐾𝑁 … … . . 𝐍𝐢𝐜𝐞 !
So, the depth provided is adequate for both flexure and shear.

156
CHAPTER-Five
5. LATERAL LOAD ANALYSIS
5.1. Introduction
The lateral loads on the structures are of mainly Earthquake and wind loads. The occurrence
of these loads simultaneously on the structure is very rare and therefore, we will design the
structure for the governing load among the two. Thus, the design process involves the
determination of the two loads separately and designing for the maximum effect. In the
following sections the seismic load on the structure is calculated followed by the
determination of the wind load on the building.
Earth quake load analysis
Depending on the structural classification of the building, one the following type of analysis is
used.
 Static analysis
 Dynamic analysis
 Static (building code) analysis method
This type of analysis is applied to buildings whose response is not significantly affected by
contribution from higher modes vibration. These requirements are claimed to be satisfied by
buildings which;
a) Meets the criteria for regularity in plan and elevation.
b) Have fundamental periods of vibration T, in the two main directions is less than 2secs.
 Dynamic Analysis method (time History, response spectrum)
This type of analysis shall be applied;-
 To buildings which do not satisfied the condition given in static analysis.
 For buildings not complying with criteria for regularity significantly to the global
response shall be taken into account.
 To all type of building.

157
There are also various analysis procedures used for analyzing buildings subjected to seismic
actions. The following are some cases.
 Time-history analysis: - most accurate and it is performed as a nonlinear analysis.

 Empirical analysis: - this approach can be used accurately for structures that are regular
in configuration and up to 70m tall.
 Modal analysis: - it uses elastic properties and assumes the building base is fixed and
analyze the building with 90% mass proportion in each orthogonal direction.
Static analysis
 It can be applied to buildings whose response is not significantly affected by

contributions from higher modes of vibrations.
Requirements
• The building should be regular both in plan and elevation

• The fundamental period (T) of the building should be less than 2 sec.
5.2. Base shear force determination

Earthquake stars from the base and is the function of the total weight of the structure. As the
weight of the structure increases, so does the effect of the load on the structure. The total
seismic load on the structure at the base is called the base shear force. The seismic base
shear force for each horizontal direction in which the building is analyzed, shall be
determined using the following expression:
Fb= Sd(T1) *W
Where
 Fb is the base shear force

 T1 is the fundamental period
 Sd(T1) is the ordinate of the design spectrum at period T
 W is the permanent load plus 25% of live load

158
Sd(T1) = α ß γ
Where
 α is the ratio of design bed lock acceleration to acceleration of gravity

 ß is the design response factor
 γ is the behavior factor
α = α0I
Where
 α0 is the bed rock acceleration

 I is the importance factor
The project building is located Adama which is zone-4 and category Iv (From EBCS-8,
1995, Section 1.4.3, Table 1.3, Page 12-14.). Buildings are generally classified into four
importance categories which depend on the size of the building, on its value and importance
for the public safety and on the possibility of human losses in case of a collapse. The
importance categories are characterized by different importance factors I as shown in table
below. The importance factor I =0 is associated with a design seismic event having a
reference return period of 100years.
From EBCS-8, 1995, Section 2.3.6, Table 2.4, Page 29) our building is categorized under
category III. So the importance factor is 1 and the bed rock acceleration is 0.01.
Then α = α0I = 0.01*1=0.01
Design response factor (ß)
ß=1.2*S/T2/3≤2.5
Where
 S is the site coefficient for soil characteristics. In our case it is sub soil class A which
is 1. The soil is sub soil class A (class A includes rock, stiff deposits of sand, gravel
or over consolidated clay)
 T1 is the fundamental period of vibration of the structure for translational motion in
the direction of motion. For the buildings with heights up to 80m, the value of T1
may be approximated.

159
T1= C1*H3/4
Where
 H = height of the building above the base in meters

 C1 = 0.075 for RC moment resisting frames and eccentrically braced steel frames.
Therefore, T1 = 0.075*(21.9) ¾
= 0.488≈0.5sec<2sec. So, we now know that quasi-static
method is used.
ß=1.2*S/T2/3≤2.5
ß=1.2*1/(0.5)2/3≤2.5
ß=1.9≤2.5…OK
Now let us find the behavior factor to account for energy dissipation capacity.
γ = γo *KD *KR *KW ≤ 0.70
Where
 γo is the basic type of behavior factor=0.2 for frame system

 KD is the factor reflecting ductility=2 for class low
 KR is the factor reflecting regularity in elevation=1 for regular structures
 KW is the factor reflecting prevailing failure mode in structural systems=1 for
frame and frame equivalent dual system.
Basic value of Behavior factor, from EBCS-8, 1995, Section 3.3.2.1 Table 3.2, Page 37
 =0.2 For frame system

Factor reflecting the ductility class, from EBCS-8, 1995, Section 3.2, Page 35 and 38.
 =2 For low ductility

Factor reflecting the structural regularity in elevation, from EBCS-8, 1995, Section 3.3.2.
Table 3.2, Page 38.
 =1 For regular structure

Factor reflecting the preventive failure mode in structural system with wall, from EBCS-8,
1995, Section 3.3.2, Page38.

160
 =1 For frame and frame equivalent dual system

γ=0.2*2*1*1=0.4≤0.7…. OK
Then,
Sd(T1) = α ß γ
Sd(T1)=0.01*1.9*0.4=0.0228
The base shear force for each main direction is determined from;
Fb= Sd(T1)W
= 0.0228*W
Now we need to determine the weight of the structure. To calculate the mass, we need to
have the weight of the components of the structure; column, slab, and beam. However, the
cross section of these components has not yet been determined so we need to estimate the
optimal section.

161
Mass Calculation for Basement column (height 3.45 m)

Axis Designation Unit Height/ Length Area Volume No of Weight
Column
Weight width Ly Lx (m²) (m³) (KN)
A/(1-5) C1 25 3.45 0.40 0.40 0.16 0.552 5 69.00
B/(1-5) C2 25 3.45 0.40 0.40 0.16 0.552 5 69.00
C/(1-5) C3 25 3.45 0.40 0.40 0.16 0.552 5 69.00
Total for Basement floor columns 207.00
Mass Calculation for Ground Column floor column (height 3.45 m)

Weight width Ly Lx (m²) (m³) Column (KN)
A/(1-5) C1 25 3.45 0.40 0.40 0.16 0.552 5 69.00
B/(1-5) C2 25 3.45 0.40 0.40 0.16 0.552 5 69.00
C/(1-5) C3 25 3.45 0.40 0.40 0.16 0.552 5 69.00
D/(1-5) C4 25 3.45 0.40 0.40 0.16 0.552 5 69.00
Total for Ground floor columns
276.00
Mass Calculation for First - Roof Column floor column (height 3 m)

Weight width Ly Lx (m²) (m³) Column (KN)
A/(1-5) C1 25 3 0.40 0.40 0.16 0.48 5 60.00
B/(1-5) C2 25 3 0.40 0.40 0.16 0.48 5 60.00
C/(1-5) C3 25 3 0.40 0.40 0.16 0.48 5 60.00
D/(1-5) C4 25 3 0.40 0.40 0.16 0.48 5 60.00
Total for First - Roof columns 240.00

162
External HCB Wall
Mass Weight Calculation for Basement Floor Wall

Axis Designation Unit Length Area Volume Weight
Thickness
Weight Hight Length (m²) (m³) (KN)
A/(1-5) BW1 14 0.20 3.45 14.54 50.16 10.03 140.4564
C/(1-5) BW2 14 0.20 3.45 14.54 50.16 10.03 140.4564
1/(A-C) BW3 14 0.20 3.45 5.41 18.66 3.73 52.2606
5/(A-C) BW4 14 0.20 3.45 5.41 18.66 3.73 52.2606
Total for Basement floor 385.434
External HCB Wall
Mass Weight Calculation for Ground - 4th floor Wall

Thickness
Weight Height Length (m²) (m³) (KN)
A/(1-5) GW1 14 0.20 3.45 14.54 50.163 10.0326 140.4564
D/(1-5) GW2 14 0.20 3.45 14.54 50.163 10.0326 140.4564
1/(A-D) GW3 14 0.20 3.45 7.64 26.358 5.2716 73.8024
5/(A-D) GW4 14 0.20 3.45 7.64 26.358 5.2716 73.8024
Total for Ground floor - 4th floor 428.5176
Internal HCB Wall
Mass Weight Calculation for Ground - 4th floor Wall

Thickness
Weight Height Length (m²) (m³) (KN)
A-B(1-5) GW1 14 0.15 3.00 14.05 42.15 6.3225 88.515
B-C/(1-5) GW2 14 0.15 3.00 13.33 39.99 5.9985 83.979
C-D/(A-D) GW3 14 0.15 3.00 25.02 75.06 11.259 157.626


163
Mass Weight Calculation for Basement beam

Axis Designation Unit Area Volume No of Weight
Length Height Width
Weight (m²) (m³) Item (KN)
A/(1-5) GFB1 25 11.89 0.50 0.30 0.15 1.7835 3 133.76
1/(A-C) GFB2 25 5.01 0.50 0.30 0.15 0.7515 5 93.94
227.7
Mass Weight Calculation for Ground -4th Floor beam

Axis Designation Unit Area Volume No of Weight
Length Height Width
Weight (m²) (m³) Item (KN)
A/(1-5) GFB1 25 11.89 0.50 0.30 0.15 1.7835 4 178.35
1/(A-C) GFB2 25 7.24 0.50 0.30 0.15 1.086 5 135.75
314.1
Mass Weight Calculation Ground - Roof floor slab

Axis Designation Unit Thickness Length Area Volume Weight
Weight LY LX (m²) (m³) (KN)
1-5/(A-B) S1 25 0.15 5.19 2.81 14.5839 2.187585 54.68963

S2 25 0.15 3.20 2.81 8.992 1.3488 33.72
S3 25 0.15 3.87 2.81 10.8747 1.631205 40.78013
S4 25 0.15 3.87 2.81 10.8747 1.631205 40.78013
1-5/(B-C) S5 25 0.15 3.20 3.00 9.6 1.44 36
S6 25 0.15 3.87 3.00 11.61 1.7415 43.5375
S7 25 0.15 3.87 3.00 11.61 1.7415 43.5375
1-5/(C-D) S8 25 0.15 5.19 2.63 13.6497 2.047455 51.18638
S9 25 0.15 3.20 2.63 8.416 1.2624 31.56
S10 25 0.15 3.87 2.63 10.1781 1.526715 38.16788
S11 25 0.15 3.87 2.63 10.1781 1.526715 38.16788
Cantiliver C1 25 0.15 17.50 1.00 17.5 2.625 65.625
C2 25 0.15 10.84 1.00 10.84 1.626 40.65
C3 25 0.15 17.50 1.00 17.5 2.625 65.625

164
Stair case
Mass Weight Calculation Basement - 4th Floor

Unit Length Area Volume Weight
Axis Designation Thickness
Weight LX LY (m²) (m³) (KN)
1-1'/(A-B) Flight-1 25 0.15 1.40 2.82 3.95 0.59 14.81
Landing-1 25 0.15 1.50 3.20 4.80 0.72 18.00
Flight - 2 25 0.15 1.40 2.82 3.95 0.59 14.81
Total for Basement - 4th Floor 47.61
Weight Of the Structure
Floor Level Weight
Basement 867.744
Ground 2020.3746
1st Floor 1984.3746
2nd Floor 1984.3746
3rd Floor 1984.3746
4th Floor 1984.3746
Roof 1053.837
Weight of the foundation is 10 % of 1,187.95

weight of the structure
Live load applied on the structure is 25% 2,969.86

Weight of the structure
Total Weight of Structure

16,037.26

165
Now the base shear force of the building will be
𝐹𝑏 = 𝑆𝑑(𝑇1) ∗ 𝑊
𝐹𝑏 = 0.0228 ∗ 16037.26
𝑭𝒃 = 𝟑𝟔𝟓. 𝟔𝟒𝟗𝑲𝑵
5.3. Story shear force determination (Fi)

Distribute the base shear force over the height of the building with the help of the following
equation.
Fi = (Fb-Ft) *Wi*Hi/⅀Wj*hj
Ft=0 for T<0.7sec
=0.07T1Fb≤0.25 Fb
Where
 N=number of stories
 Fi=concentrated lateral force acting at floor I
 Ft=concentrated extra force in addition to Fn at top of the building accounting for
whiplash effect for slender column.
In our case T=0.5 sec so, Ft=0
H1=3.45m/2=1.725m
H2=3.45m+3.45m/2= 5.175m
H3=3.45m+3.45+3.45m/2=7.56m
H4=3.45m+3.45m+3.45m+3.45m/2=12.075m
H5=3.45m+3.45m+3.45m+3.45m+3.45m/2=15.525m
H6 = 3.45m+3.45m+3.45m+3.45m+3.45m +3.45m/2=18.975m
H7 = 3.45m+3.45m+3.45m+3.45m+3.45m+3.45m +3.45m/2 = 22.425
H8 = 3.45m+3.45+3.45m+3.45m+3.45m+3.45m+3.45m +3.45m/2 = 25.875

166
Table 16 : Story shear force

(Fb-Ft)*
Floor Weight hi Wi*hi Fb-Ft Fi
Wi*hi
Footing 867.744 1.75 1518.552 365.649 555257 3.195382
Basement 2020.3746 5.175 10455.44 365.649 3823021 22.00064
Ground 1984.3746 7.56 15001.87 365.649 5485419 31.56738
1st 1984.3746 12.075 23961.32 365.649 8761433 50.42012
2nd 1984.3746 15.525 30807.42 365.649 11264702 64.82588
3rd 1984.3746 18.975 37653.51 365.649 13767968 79.23162
4th 1053.837 22.425 23632.29 365.649 8641123 49.72776
1,187.95 30738.21 11239396 64.68025

Roof 25.875 365.649
⅀ 173,768.6 365.649

167
Roof
64.68 KN
4th Floor
49.727 KN
3rd Floor
79.831 KN
2nd Floor
64.825 KN
1st Floor
50.42 KN
Ground Floor
31.567 KN
Basement
22.00 KN
Footing
3.195 KN
Figure 12 Distribution of horizontal seismic force

168
5.4. Story shear from wind load

The procedure for the determination of wind pressure and the formulas employed in wind
pressure determination may be referred from the section under roof design.
Design information
The building is located in Adama town. Therefore, according to EBCS-1, 1995 the area is
categorized according to the following:
 Terrain Category: According to Table 3.2 of EBCS-1, 1995 Adama town falls under
Terrain Category-IV. Category is characterized with
o Terrain factor,𝐾𝑇 = 0.24,
o Roughness length, 𝑧0 = 1𝑚,
o Minimum height, 𝑧𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 16𝑚
 Topography coefficient, 𝑐𝑡 (𝑧) : no escarpment or hills are located around the building
site which means the site is topography unaffected zone and therefore, 𝑐𝑡 (𝑧) = 1
according to section 3.8.4 of EBCS-1, 1995, Figure 3.7 , page 58
 Dynamic coefficient,𝐶𝑑 : According to Figure 3.7 of EBCS-1, 1995 dynamic coefficient is
approximately 0.90. Therefore we can apply static method of analysis of wind load.
 Roughness coefficient:
K T ln (z⁄z0 ) For zmin ≤ z ≤ 200m
cr (z) = {
cr (zmin ) For z ≤ zmin
Where: Z = height of the building at the roof level
Where:
Z = height of the building at the roof level

169
Shape of the structure
Figure 5.2 General shapes of structures covered by the design procedure the structural
dimensions and the reference height used are also shown. (As per Euro code 1 Part 1,4 – pr EN
1991-1- 4-2004 Figure 6.1, Page 29)
Cases: For wind direction

Case-1 When θ = 0 º
h= 21.90 m
Wind
d= 11.46 m
b=18.85 m
b = 18.85 m, d = 11.46 m, h = 21.90 m

 When h < b the building considered to be one part
 When b < h ≤ 2b the building considered to be two part
 When h > 2b the building shall be considered to be multiple part

170
In our case
𝒉
The reference height, for walls of rectangular plan buildings depends on the aspect ratio 𝒃 and for
buildings, whose height h is greater than b and less than 2b, shall be considered to be two parts.
Building Reference Shape of Profile
hight hight of velocity pressure
3.05 m Ze =21.9 m
Ze = 18.85 m
18.85 m
Z
Figure 5.3 Reference height, Ze depending on h and b and corresponding velocity pressure
profile ((As per Euro code 1 Part 1,4 – pr EN 1991-1- 4-2004 Figure 7.4, Page 35).

171
Therefore
In our case Ze = 21.90 m and Ze = 18.85 m
also z0 = 1.00 m and zmin = 16.00m.
i.e. zmin ≤ ze ≤ 200m and
21.9 18.85
𝑐𝑟 (21.90) = 0.24 ln 1.00 = 0.74 and 𝑐𝑟 (18.85) = 0.24 ln = 0.704
1.00
 Exposure coefficient, Ce (z):

𝟕𝐤 𝐓
𝐜𝐞 (𝐳) = 𝐜𝐫𝟐 (𝐳)𝐜𝐭𝟐 (𝐳) [𝟏 + ]
Where:
7 ∗ 0.24
𝑐𝑒 (𝑍) = 𝑐𝑒 (21.9) = 0.742 ∗ 12 [1 + ] = 1.801
0.74 ∗ 1
7 ∗ 0.24
𝑐𝑒 (𝑍) = 𝑐𝑒 (18.85) = 0.7042 ∗ 12 [1 + ] = 1.670
0.704 ∗ 1

172
External wind pressure:

1
Where:
The building is located at Adama town at an altitude of 1712 m above sea level. For this area the
reference wind velocity is to be taken as 22 m/s (EBCS 1, 1995, article 3.7.2)
is 1712 by interpolating between 2000m and 1500m we get air density for 1712m. refer from
EBCS-1 1995 table 3.1 page 55.
 The reference wind velocity ( Vref )
𝑉𝑟𝑒𝑓 = 𝐶𝐷𝐼𝑅 𝐶𝑇𝐸𝑀 𝐶𝐴𝐿𝑇 𝑉𝑟𝑒𝑓,0

Where 𝑉𝑟𝑒𝑓,0 is the basic value of the reference wind velocity to be taken as 22 m/s.
Therefor:
𝑉𝑟𝑒𝑓 = 1.0 ∗ 1.0 ∗ 1.0 ∗ 22 m/s
𝑽𝒓𝒆𝒇 = 𝟐𝟐m/s
1 1

173
For Ze = 21.9 For Ze = 18.85
We = q ref ce (21.9)cpe We = q ref ce (18.55)cpe
𝑊𝑒 = 0.235 ∗ 1.801 ∗ 𝑐𝑝𝑒 𝑊𝑒 = 0.235 ∗ 1.67 ∗ 𝑐𝑝𝑒
𝑾𝒆 = 𝟎. 𝟒𝟐𝟑 𝒄𝒑𝒆 (𝐊𝐍/𝐦²) 𝑾𝒆 = 0.392 𝒄𝒑𝒆 (𝐊𝐍/𝐦²)
Internal wind pressure:

Where:𝑐𝑝𝑖 = Internal wind pressure coefficient
For Zi = 21.9 For Zi = 18.55
Wi = q ref ci (21.9) cpi Wi = q ref ci (18.55)cpi
𝑊𝑖 = 0.235 ∗ 1.801 ∗ 𝑐𝑝𝑖 𝑊𝑖 = 0.235 ∗ 1.67 ∗ 𝑐𝑝𝑖
𝑾𝒊 = 𝟎. 𝟒𝟐𝟑 𝒄𝒑𝒊 (𝐊𝐍/𝐦²) 𝑾𝒊 = 0.392𝒄𝒑𝒊 (𝐊𝐍/𝐦²)

174
Determination of pressure coefficients, 𝒄𝒑𝒆
Elevation division (zoning)
For vertical walls the following zoning division is used
For elevation division there are three cases based on Euro code 1 Part 1,4 – pr EN 1991-1- 4-
2004 Figure 7.5.but when we see our code there are only two cases on EBCS-1/1995 ,Figure A-3,
Page 71.
 Case 1 – Elevation for 𝑑 > 𝒆

 Case 2 – Elevation for 𝑑 < 𝒆
Figure 5.4 Key for vertical wall (EBCS-1/1995, Figure A-3, Page 71)
In our case:
h= 21.9 m
d= 11.46 m
B =18.85 m

175
Wind b =18.5 m
d = 11.46 m
In our case
Since
b = 18.85, h = 21.9 m , d = 11.46
e = min{b, 2h}
b = 18.85 m
e = min {
2h = 2 ∗ 21.9 = 43.8 m
𝑒 = 18.85𝑚
𝑒 18.85 𝑚
= = 3.77 𝑚
5 5
𝑒 = 18.85 𝑚 > 𝑑 = 11.46 𝑚
For 𝑑 < 𝑒, the following zoning A and B* will be used according to EBCS-1/1995,page 71 as
explained in the above figure.
𝑑 11.46𝑚
= = 0.52
ℎ 21.9 𝑚

176
e/5
A B* h
Figure 5.5 local and overall external pressure coefficients for each zone
I
C
0.5e H B
0.1e F G F
0.8e d
A
h 0.25e 0.25e
D
0.2e

177
Magnitude for external pressure coefficients 𝐜𝐩𝐞
The magnitude of the pressure coefficients, Cpe depends on the loaded area of the roof. Different
zones of the loaded area are subjected to different magnitudes the Cpe values are denoted as
bellow.
A ≤ 1m2 , cpe = cpe,1
A ≥ 10m2 , cpe = cpe,10
The values of cpe,1 and cpe,10 are given on Tables A.1of EBCS-1/1995 for vertical wall of
rectangular plan building.
Zone A B,B* C D E
𝑑/ℎ Cpe,10 Cpe,1 Cpe,10 Cpe,1 Cpe,10 Cpe,1 Cpe,10 Cpe,1 Cpe,10 Cpe,1
≤1 - 1.0 - 1.3 - 0.8 - 0.1 - 0.5 + 0.8 + 1.0 -0.3
≥4 - 1.0 -1.3 - 0.8 - 0.1 - 0.5 + 0.8 + 1.0 -0.3
0.40 -1.0 -1.3 -0.8 -1.0 -0.5 +0.8 +1.0 - 0.3
Table 17 External pressure coefficients, 𝒄𝒑𝒆 for each zone

Lower (h= 18.85m) Upper ( h= 3.05 m)
Zone Area(m ²) Cpe, = Cpe,10 Area(m ²) Cpe, = Cpe,10
A 3.7*18.85 69.745 - 1.0 3.7 * 3.05 11.285 - 1.0
B* 15.08*18.85 284.25 - 0.8 15.05*3.05 45.9 - 0.8
D 18.85*18.85 355.32 + 0.8 3.05*18.85 57.49 + 0.8
E 18.85*18.85 355.32 - 0.3 3.05*18.85 57.46 - 0.3

178
After computing the external pressure coefficients the wind pressure will be tabulated below
𝑨𝒕 𝒁𝒆 = 𝟏𝟖. 𝟖𝟓 𝒎 𝑨𝒕 𝒁𝒆 = 𝟐𝟏. 𝟗𝟎 𝒎
.Zone Cpe, = Cpe,10
We= 0.392 𝒄𝒑𝒆 (𝐊𝐍/𝐦²) 𝑾𝒆 = 𝟎. 𝟒𝟐𝟑 𝒄𝒑𝒆 (𝐊𝐍/𝐦²)
A - 1.0 - 0.392 - 0.423
B* - 0.8 - 0.313 - 0.338
D + 0.8 + 0.313 + 0.338
E - 0.3 - 0.117 - 0.126
Summary of external pressure
At the Top Part of the building. H = 3.05
External pressure applied laterally on the Structure We.
 Between A (Front ) and A (Rear) = - 0.423 + 0.423 = 0

 Between B* (Front ) and B* (Rear) = - 0.338 + 0.338 = 0
 Between D(Front ) and E (Rear) = 0.338 + 0.126 = 0.464 KN/m2
At the Bottom Part of the building. H=18.85
 Between A(Front ) and A (Rear) = - 0.392 + 0.392 = 0

 Between D (Front ) and E (Rear) = 0.313 + 0.117 = 0.43 KN/m2

179
Distribution of wind pressure
The wind pressure force acting on the frames are obtained by multiplying the pressure intensity
and half height of above the frame and half height below the frame system.
ℎ𝑢𝑝𝑝𝑒𝑟 ℎ𝑙𝑜𝑤𝑒𝑟
i.e Wind Force = Pressure * ( + ) * Width
2 2
Floor Wind pressure Height Width Force

Ground 0.43 3.45 11.46 17.0
1st Floor 0.43 3.45 11.46 17.0
2nd Floor 0.43 3.45 11.46 17.0
3rd Floor 0.464 3 11.46 15.95
4th Floor 0.464 3 11.46 15.95
Roof 0.464 1.5 11.46 7.97
Roof Level
7.95 KN
4th Floor
15.95 KN
3rd Floor
15.95 KN
2nd Floor
17 KN
1st Floor
17 KN
Ground Floor
17 KN
Figure 13 Distribution of horizontal wind force 00

180
Cases: For wind direction
Case - 2 When θ = 90 º
Wind
h= 21.9 m Wind
b= 11.46 m
d =18.85 m
b = 11.46 m, d = 18.85 m, h = 21.9 m
Wall Division
Euro code 1 Part 1,4 – pr EN 1991-1-4-2004, Figure 7.4 page35 gives three conditions for
vertical wall division of rectangular buildings depending on their h/b ratio which are
 When h < b the building considered to be one part
 When b < h ≤ 2b the building considered to be two part
 When h > 2b the building shall be considered to be multiple part

181
In our case
𝒉
The reference height, for walls of rectangular plan buildings depends on the aspect ratio 𝒃 and for
buildings, whose height h is greater than b and less than 2b, shall be considered to be two parts.
Building Reference Shape of Profile
hight hight of velocity pressure
Ze =21.9 m
3.05 m
Ze = 18.85 m
18.85 m
Figure 5.2 Reference height, Ze depending on h and b and corresponding velocity pressure
profile ((As per Euro code 1 Part 1,4 – pr EN 1991-1- 4-2004 Figure 7.4, Page 35).

182
Therefore
In our case Ze = 21.90 m and Ze = 18.85 m
also z0 = 1.00 m and zmin = 16.00m.
i.e. zmin ≤ ze ≤ 200m and
21.9 18.85
𝑐𝑟 (21.90) = 0.24 ln 1.00 = 0.74 and 𝑐𝑟 (18.85) = 0.24 ln = 0.704
1.00
 Exposure coefficient, 𝐂𝐞 (𝐳):

𝟕𝐤 𝐓
𝐜𝐞 (𝐳) = 𝐜𝐫𝟐 (𝐳)𝐜𝐭𝟐 (𝐳) [𝟏 + ]
Where:

7 ∗ 0.24
𝑐𝑒 (𝑍) = 𝑐𝑒 (21.9) = 0.742 ∗ 12 [1 + ] = 1.801
0.74 ∗ 1
7 ∗ 0.24
𝑐𝑒 (𝑍) = 𝑐𝑒 (18.85) = 0.7042 ∗ 12 [1 + ] = 1.670
0.704 ∗ 1

183
External wind pressure:

1
Where:
The building is located at Adama town at an altitude of 1712 m above sea level. For this area the
reference wind velocity is to be taken as 22 m/s (EBCS 1, 1995, article 3.7.2)
is 1712 by interpolating between 2000m and 1500m we get air density for 1712m. refer from
EBCS-1 1995 table 3.1 page 55.
 The reference wind velocity ( Vref )
𝑉𝑟𝑒𝑓 = 𝐶𝐷𝐼𝑅 𝐶𝑇𝐸𝑀 𝐶𝐴𝐿𝑇 𝑉𝑟𝑒𝑓,0
Where 𝑉𝑟𝑒𝑓,0 is the basic value of the reference wind velocity to be taken as 22 m/s.

184
Therefor:
𝑉𝑟𝑒𝑓 = 1.0 ∗ 1.0 ∗ 1.0 ∗ 22 m/s
𝑽𝒓𝒆𝒇 = 𝟐𝟐m/s
1 1
For Ze = 21.9 For Ze = 18.85
We = q ref ce (21.9)cpe We = q ref ce (18.55)cpe
𝑊𝑒 = 0.235 ∗ 1.801 ∗ 𝑐𝑝𝑒 𝑊𝑒 = 0.235 ∗ 1.67 ∗ 𝑐𝑝𝑒
𝑾𝒆 = 𝟎. 𝟒𝟐𝟑 𝒄𝒑𝒆 (𝐊𝐍/𝐦²) 𝑾𝒆 = 0.392 𝒄𝒑𝒆 (𝐊𝐍/𝐦²)
Internal wind pressure:

Where:𝑐𝑝𝑖 = Internal wind pressure coefficient
For Zi = 21.9 For Zi = 18.55
Wi = q ref ci (21.9) cpi Wi = q ref ci (18.55)cpi
𝑊𝑖 = 0.235 ∗ 1.801 ∗ 𝑐𝑝𝑖 𝑊𝑖 = 0.235 ∗ 1.67 ∗ 𝑐𝑝𝑖
𝑾𝒊 = 𝟎. 𝟒𝟐𝟑 𝒄𝒑𝒊 (𝐊𝐍/𝐦²) 𝑾𝒊 = 0.392𝒄𝒑𝒊 (𝐊𝐍/𝐦²)

185
Determination of pressure coefficients, 𝒄𝒑𝒆

Elevation division (zoning)
For vertical walls the following zoning division is used
For elevation division there are three cases based on Euro code 1 Part 1,4 – pr EN 1991-1- 4-
2004 Figure 7.5.but when we see our code there are only two cases on EBCS-1/1995 ,Figure A-3,
Page 71.
 Case 1 – Elevation for 𝑑 > 𝒆
 Case 2 – Elevation for 𝑑 < 𝒆
Figure 14 Key for vertical wall (EBCS-1/1995, Figure A-3, Page 71)
In our case:
h= 21.9 m
d= 18.85 m
B =11.46 m

186
Wind
b =11.46 m
d = 18.85 m
In our case
Since
b = 11.46, h = 21.9 m , d = 18.55
e = min{b, 2h}
b = 11.46 m
e = min {
2h = 2 ∗ 21.9 = 43.8 m
𝑒 = 11.46𝑚
𝑒 11.46 𝑚
= = 2.29 𝑚
5 5
𝑒 = 11.46 𝑚 < 𝑑 = 18.55 𝑚
For 𝑑 > 𝑒, the following zoning A, B* and C will be used according to EBCS-1/1995,page 71 as
explained in the above figure.
𝑑 11.46𝑚
= = 0.52
ℎ 21.9 𝑚
e/5
A B* C h
Figure 15 local and overall external pressure coefficients for each zone

187
I
C
0.5e H B
0.1e F G F
0.8e d
A
h 0.25e 0.25e
D
0.2e
Magnitude for external pressure coefficients 𝐜𝐩𝐞

The magnitude of the pressure coefficients, Cpe depends on the loaded area of the roof. Different
zones of the loaded area are subjected to different magnitudes the Cpe values are denoted as
bellow.
A ≤ 1m2 , cpe = cpe,1
A ≥ 10m2 , cpe = cpe,10
The values of cpe,1 and cpe,10 are given on Tables A.1of EBCS-1/1995 for vertical wall of
rectangular plan building.
Zone A B,B* C D E
𝑑/ℎ Cpe,10 Cpe,1 Cpe,10 Cpe,1 Cpe,10 Cpe,1 Cpe,10 Cpe,1 Cpe,10 Cpe,1
≤1 - 1.0 - 1.3 - 0.8 - 0.1 - 0.5 + 0.8 + 1.0 -0.3
≥4 - 1.0 -1.3 - 0.8 - 0.1 - 0.5 + 0.8 + 1.0 -0.3
0.40 -1.0 -1.3 -0.8 -1.0 -0.5 +0.8 +1.0 - 0.3

188
Table 18 External pressure coefficients, 𝒄𝒑𝒆 for each zone

Lower (h= 18.85m) Upper ( h= 3.05 m)
Zone Area(m ²) Cpe, = Cpe,10 Area(m ²) Cpe, = Cpe,10
A 4.29*18.85 33.2 - 1.0 4.29 * 3.05 13.08 - 1.0
B* 9.17*18.85 172.816 - 0.8 9.17*3.05 27.96 - 0.8
D 18.85*11.46 216.02 + 0.8 3.05*18.85 57.49 + 0.8
E 18.85*11.46 216.02 - 0.3 3.05*18.85 57.49 - 0.3
After computing the external pressure coefficients the wind pressure will be tabulated below
𝑨𝒕 𝒁𝒆 = 𝟏𝟖. 𝟖𝟓 𝒎 𝑨𝒕 𝒁𝒆 = 𝟐𝟏. 𝟗𝟎 𝒎
.Zone Cpe, = Cpe,10
We= 0.392 𝒄𝒑𝒆 (𝐊𝐍/𝐦²) 𝑾𝒆 = 𝟎. 𝟒𝟐𝟑 𝒄𝒑𝒆 (𝐊𝐍/𝐦²)
A - 1.0 - 0.392 - 0.423
B* - 0.8 - 0.313 - 0.338
D + 0.8 + 0.313 + 0.338
E - 0.3 - 0.117 - 0.126
Summary of external pressure

At the Top Part of the building. H = 3.05
 Between A (Front ) and A (Rear) = - 0.423 + 0.423 = 0

 Between D(Front ) and E (Rear) = 0.338 + 0.126 = 0.464 KN/m2
At the Bottom Part of the building. H=18.85
 Between A(Front ) and A (Rear) = - 0.392 + 0.392 = 0

 Between D (Front ) and E (Rear) = 0.313 + 0.117 = 0.43 KN/m2

189
Distribution of wind pressure
The wind pressure force acting on the frames are obtained by multiplying the pressure intensity
and half height of above the frame and half height below the frame system.
ℎ𝑢𝑝𝑝𝑒𝑟 ℎ𝑙𝑜𝑤𝑒𝑟
i.e Wind Force = Pressure * ( + ) * Width
2 2
Floor Wind pressure Height Width Force

Ground 0.43 3.45 11.46 17.0
1st Floor 0.43 3.45 11.46 17.0
2nd Floor 0.43 3.45 11.46 17.0
3rd Floor 0.464 3 11.46 15.95
4th Floor 0.464 3 11.46 15.95
Roof 0.464 1.5 11.46 7.97
Roof Level
7.95 KN
4th Floor
15.95 KN
3rd Floor
15.95 KN
2nd Floor
17 KN
1st Floor 17 KN
Ground Floor
17 KN
Figure 16 Distribution of horizontal wind force 900

190
5.5. Later load from the governing story shear
5.5.1. Distribution of story shear to frame system
5.5.2. Calculation of center of mass

The horizontal forces at each floor level Ft, determined above are distributed to lateral load
resistive structural elements in proportion to their rigidities assuming rigid floor
diaphragms.
Center of mass (Xm,Ym) is a point on a floor level where the whole floor mass and its
inertial effects can be replaced using a lumped equivalent mass.
Xm=⅀Wi*Xi/⅀Wi
Ym=⅀Wi*Yi/⅀Wi
Table 19 : Center of mass for the floor system
Floor level Xm Ym
Basement 8.1 5.1
Ground floor 8.9 4.3
First floor 8.9 4.2
Second floor 8.9 4.2
Third floor 9 4.2
Fourth floor 9.1 4.2
Roof 8.3 4.2

191
5.5.3. Determination of center of stiffness
Center of stiffness is the point where the stiffness at the strength of the floor is concentrated.
A point which is subjected to a force, the body will not rotate, it will only translate.
Xs=⅀Diy*Xi/⅀Diy
Ys=⅀Dix*Yi/⅀Dix
Where
o Dix=akixc……. actual stiffness of particular element along X
o Diy=akiyc……. actual stiffness of particular element along Y
o Kx=Iy/L=hb3/12L
o Ky=Iy/L=bh3/12L
D-Value of resisting elements at any one story is defined by the amount of shear reactive to
the element when the relative horizontal displacement at the story under consideration has a
unit value. To calculate the D-value, assume a shearing force distribution and solve for
stress and deformation of the framing elements. D value or the rigidity of a column has a
relation
 Stiffness of a column itself
 Stiffness of upper and lower base
 Height of upper and lower column
 Upper and lower shear force
 Location of story
Shear center (Xi,Yi) is a point where the center of stiffness of the ith shear wall or column is
located.
a= 𝑘’/2+ 𝑘’……for general case
a=(0.5+ 𝑘’)/(2+ 𝑘’)……for fixed column base
a=(0.5* 𝑘’)/(1+ 2𝑘’)……for pin supported columns
Where
 𝑘’=Σ𝐾𝑏𝑒𝑎𝑚/2𝐾𝑐, for general case
 𝑘′=Σ𝐾𝑏𝑒𝑎𝑚/𝐾𝑐, for fixed column base

192
Case-1
K=I/L
K=0.5*(K1+K2+K3+K4)/Kc
K1 K2
K3 K4
Case-2
K=0.5*(K2+K4)/Kc
K2
K4
Stiffness
For beams, for TTB, 30*45
 I = bh3/12 = 0.30*0.453/12 = 2.2*10-4m4
 K=EI/L=E*(2.2*10-4m4)/L
For Beams GB, FB beams (35*50) cm
 I = bh3/12 = 0.35*0.53/12 = 3.6*10-4m4
 K=EI/L=E*(3.6*10-4m4)/L
For column, (40*40) cm
 I=bh3/12= 0.4*0.43/12 = 2.1*10-4m4
 K=EI/L=E*(2.1*10-4m4)/L
Table 20: Summary of column stiffness
Floor Height B h Kxc Kyc
Footing - 3.45 40 40
3rd Floor 618.35 618.35
4th – roof 3 40 40
Floor 711.11 711.11
Kxc=bh3/hr*12
Kyc=hb3/hr*12
Kb=bh3/12*L

193
Table 21: Summary of beam stiffness

Floor Beam Length b h Kb
Roof Axis A b/n (1&5) 14.59 30 45 478.624
TTB, Axis B b/n (1&5) 14.59 30 45 478.624
(30*45) Axis C b/n (1&5) 14.59 30 45 478.624
Axis D b/n (1&5) 14.59 30 45 478.624
Axis 1 b/n (A&D) 7.24 30 45 237.508
Axis 2 b/n (A&D) 7.24 30 45 237.508
Axis 3 b/n (A&D) 7.24 30 45 237.508
Axis 4 b/n (A&D) 7.24 30 45 237.508
Axis 4 b/n (A&D) 7.24 30 45 237.508
Floor Axis A b/n (1&5) 14.59 35 50 765.975
Beam, Axis B b/n (1&5) 14.59 35 50 765.975
Grade
Axis C b/n (1&5) 14.59 35 50 765.975
Beam
Axis D b/n (1&5) 14.59 35 50 765.975
(35*50)
Axis 1 b/n (A&D) 7.24 35 50 380.10
Axis 2 b/n (A&D) 7.24 35 50 380.10
Axis 3 b/n (A&D) 7.24 35 50 380.10
Axis 4 b/n (A&D) 7.24 35 50 380.10
Axis 4 b/n (A&D) 7.24 35 50 380.10
Kb1 Kb2
Kb1 Kb2
Kb3 Kb4
Kb1
Kb2
K’= Kb1+ Kb2/ 2KC
a=(0.5+K’)/(2+K’)
K’= Kb1+ Kb2/ 2KC a=K’/(2+K’)
K’= (Kb1+ Kb2+ Kb3+ Kb4)/ 2KC

194
Along X-direction (D=Kcx*a)
1 2 3 4 5
KC = 711.11 711.11 711.11 711.11 ROOF

K’= 0.875 1.752 1.754 1.757
a = 0.304 0.467 0.467 0.468
D= 216.44 332.02 332.3 332.58
⅀DXI= 1213.34 765.975 765.975 765.975
KC= 711.11 711.11 711.11 711.11 4th

K’=1.07 2.156 2.159 2.161
a= 0.35 0.519 0.519 0.519
D= 248.92 368.88 227.89 369.34
⅀DXI=1215.03 765.975 765.975 765.975
KC= 618.35 618.35 618.35 618.35 3rd
K’= 1.239 2.479 2.482 2.486
a= 0.382 0.553 0.554 0.554
D =236.50 342.25 342.45 342.64
⅀DXI= 1263.84 765.975 765.975 765.975
KC= 618.35 618.35 618.35 618.35 2nd
K’= 1.239 2.479 2.482 2.486
a= 0.382 0.553 0.554 0.554
D =236.50 342.25 342.45 342.64
⅀DXI= 1263.84 765.975 765.975 765.975
KC= 618.35 618.35 618.35 618.35 1st
K’= 1.239 2.479 2.482 2.486
a= 0.382 0.553 0.554 0.554
D =236.50 342.25 342.45 342.64
⅀DXI= 1263.84 765.975 765.975 765.975

195
KC= 618.35 618.35 618.35 618.35 Ground

K’= 1.239 2.479 2.482 2.486
a= 0.382 0.553 0.554 0.554
D =236.50 342.25 342.45 342.64
⅀DXI= 1263.84 765.975 765.975 765.975
KC= 618.35 618.35 618.35 618.35 Basement
K’= 1.239 2.479 2.482 2.486
a= 0.382 0.553 0.554 0.554
D =236.50 342.25 342.45 342.64
⅀DXI= 1263.84 765.975 765.975 765.975
KC= 618.35 618.35 618.35 618.35 Footing
K’= 1.239 2.479 2.482 2.486
a= 0.382 0.553 0.554 0.554
D =236.50 342.25 342.45 342.64
⅀DXI= 1263.84 765.975 765.975 765.975

196
Along Y-direction (D = Kcy*a)
A B C D
KC =711.11 711.11 711.11 ROOF

K’= 0.434 0.869 0.434
a=0.178 0.303 0.178
D=126.86 215.31 126.86
⅀DXI= 469.02 237.508 237.508
KC=711.11 711.11 711.11 4th
K’= 0.535 1.069 0.535
a=0.211 0.348 0.211
D=149.97 247.7 149.97
⅀DXI=547.64 380.10 380.10
KC=618.35 618.35 618.35 3rd
K’=0.615 1.229 0.615
a=0.235 0.381 0.235
D=145.37 235.4 145.37
⅀DXI=526.14 369.52 324.61
KC=618.35 618.35 618.35 2nd
K’=0.615 1.229 0.615
a=0.235 0.381 0.235
D=145.37 235.4 145.37
⅀DXI=526.14 369.52 324.61
KC=618.35 618.35 618.35 1st
K’=0.615 1.229 0.615
a=0.235 0.381 0.235
D=145.37 235.4 145.37
⅀DXI=526.14 369.52 324.61
KC=618.35 618.35 618.35 Ground
K’=0.615 1.229 0.615

197
a=0.235 0.381 0.235

D=145.37 235.4 145.37
⅀DXI=526.14 369.52 324.61
KC=618.35 618.35 618.35 Basement
K’=0.615 1.229 0.615
a=0.235 0.381 0.235
D=145.37 235.4 145.37
⅀DXI=526.14 369.52 324.61
KC=618.35 618.35 618.35 Footing
K’=0.615 1.229 0.615
a=0.235 0.381 0.235
D=145.37 235.4 145.37
⅀DXI=526.14 369.52 324.61

198
5.5.4. Center of stiffness for each floor

Xs=⅀Diy*Xi/⅀Diy
Ys=⅀Dix*Yi/⅀Dix
Xi & Yi are shear center a point through which is the external load passes then there will not
be any twisting of the section.
Table 22 summary of center of stiffness

Floo Y-axis X-axis
r Dxi Yi Dxi* Diy Yi Dxi*Yi
Yi
Roof 1 1213.3 0 0 A 469.02 0 0
TTB 2 1213.3 2.63 3190.979 B 469.02 5.19 2434.2138
3 1213.3 5.63 6830.879 C 469.02 8.39 3935.0778
4 1213.3 8.43 D 469.02 12.2
10228.119 6 5750.1852
⅀ 4853.2 20249.977 1876.08 12119.477
Ys= 4.17 XS=6.46
Base 1 1263.8 0 A 526.14 0
ment 4 0 0
to 2 1263.8 B 526.14 5.19
2.63
4th 4 3323.89 2730.6666
3 1263.8 5.63 C 526.14 8.39
4 7115.41 4414.3146
4 1263.8 8.43 D 526.14 12.26
4 10654.17 6450.4764
⅀ 5055.36 21093.49 2104.56 13595.458
Ys= 4.17 Xs= 6.46

199
Table 23 : Center of mass Vs center of stiffness
Center of stiffness Center of mass Eccentricity

Floor XS YS XM YM Ex Ey
Basement 8.1 5.1 6.46 4.17 1.64 0.93
Ground 8.9 4.3 6.46 4.17 2.44 0.13
1st 8.9 4.2 6.46 4.17 2.44 0.03
2nd 8.9 4.2 6.46 4.17 2.44 0.03
3rd 9 4.2 6.46 4.17 2.54 0.03
4th 9.1 4.2 6.46 4.17 2.64 0.03
Roof 8.3 4.2 6.46 4.17 1.84 0.03
Given the above eccentricities we know that the values are different from zero (in both
direction). Hence, there is a need for adjustment of eccentricities to withstand the torsion
that could be developed.
 Design eccentricity
In addition to the actual eccentricity, in order to account for uncertainties in the location of
masses and in the spatial variation of the seismic motion, the calculated center of mass at
each floor i shall be considered as being displaced from its nominal location in each
direction by an accidental eccentricity.
Ea = ±0.05Li
Where
Ea: is accidental eccentricity of story mass i from its normal location, applied in the same
direction at all floors
Li: Floor-dimension perpendicular to the direction of the seismic action.
i.e. Ea= ±0.05LX, When the earthquakes in the y- direction.
Ea= ±0.05LY, When the earthquakes in the x- direction
Edx = Ex±5%Ly AND Edy = Ey±5%Lx

200
Where: - Edx, Edy are accidental eccentricities in the x and y directions respectively.
The building has the following configuration
b h=11.46m and b=18.85m

Floor Edx1 Edx2 Edy1 Edy2
Basement 2.5825 0.6975 1.503 0.357
Ground 3.3825 1.4975 0.703 -0.443
1st 3.3825 1.4975 0.603 -0.543
2nd 3.3825 1.4975 0.603 -0.543
3rd 3.4825 1.5975 0.603 -0.543
4th 3.5825 1.6975 0.603 -0.543
Roof 2.7825 0.8975 0.603 -0.543
Forces in X-direction (QI)

QIX = DIX*V/⅀DIX
Floor V(story) DIX ⅀DIX Q
Footing 3.195382 1263.84 5055.36 0.41
22.00064
Basement 1263.84 5055.36 2.64
31.56738
Ground 1263.84 5055.36 5.01
50.42012
1st 1263.84 5055.36 8.00
64.82588
2nd 1263.84 5055.36 10.29
79.23162
3rd 1215.03 5055.36 12.09
49.72776
4th 1215.03 4853.2 14.89
64.68025
Roof 1215.03 4853.2 16.41

201
Direct shear force (QI) on Y-direction

QIY=DIY*V/⅀DIY
Floor V(story) DIX ⅀DIX Q

Footing 3.195382 526.14 2104.56 0.41
Basement 22.00064 526.14 2104.56 2.64
Ground 31.56738 526.14 2104.56 5.01
1st 50.42012 526.14 2104.56 8.00
2nd 64.82588 526.14 2104.56 10.29
3rd 79.23162 469.02 2104.56 11.21
4th 49.72776 469.02 1876.08 14.87
Roof 64.68025 469.02 1876.08 16.32
Direct shear force is a force which lies in the same plane or it’s a force that is parallel to the
cross section of the material. It could also be the partition of the load that is taken by one
axis of column proportional according to the stiffness of the columns/material.
5.5.4. Shear correction factor
Torsion caused by the mismatch between center of mass and center of stiffness could be
complicated by the existence of accidental eccentricities. Thus the direct shear that has been
computed has to be corrected.
The factor that is used for this correction “shear correction factor” is given by;
αix=(1+(Dix)*Edy/jr) *Yi
αiy=(1+(Diy)*Edx/jr) *Xi
Jx, Jy are D-moment of inertia, Edx & Edy are the design eccentricity in X &Y direction
respectively.
Jx=⅀(Dix*Y’2)
Jy=⅀(DiY*X’2)
X’=XI-XS
Y’=YI-YS

202
Shear correction factor for torsion
Footing column
X-direction Y-direction
Y’ DIX DIX*Y’2 X’ DIY DIX*X’2
A -8.1 1263.8 82917.92 4 -5.1 526.14 13684.9
B -2.91 1263.8 10701.98 3 -2.47 526.14 3209.928
C 0.29 1263.8 106.2856 2 0.53 526.14 147.7927
D 4.16 1263.8 21870.82 1 3.33 526.14 5834.314
⅀ 115597 22876.94
 Jr=JX+JY = 138,473.94
Basement – 3rd Column
4 -8.1 1263.8 82917.92 A -5.1 526.14 13684.9
3 -2.91 1263.8 10701.98 B -2.47 526.14 3209.928
2 0.29 1263.8 106.2856 C 0.53 526.14 147.7927
1 4.16 1263.8 21870.82 D 3.33 526.14 5834.314
⅀ 115597 22876.94
 Jr=JX+JY = 138,473.94
4th floor column
4 -8.1 1215.03 79718.12 A -5.1 547.64 14244.12
3 -2.91 1215.03 10289 B -2.47 547.64 3341.097
2 0.29 1215.03 102.184 C 0.53 547.64 153.8321
1 4.16 1215.03 21026.82 D 3.33 547.64 6072.725
⅀ 111136.1 23811.77
 Jr=JX+JY=134,947.87

203
Roof column
4 -8.1 1,213.34 79607.24 A -5.1 469.02 12199.21
3 -2.91 1,213.34 10274.68 B -2.47 469.02 2861.444
2 0.29 1,213.34 102.0419 C 0.53 469.02 131.7477
1 4.16 1,213.34 20997.58 D 3.33 469.02 5200.916
⅀ 110981.5 20393.32
 Jr=JX+JY=131,374.82
Now let us compute the correction factor for both directions.
Y-direction
 α1y1=1+ (DIY*Xi) * Edx1/jr

 α2y2=1+ (DIY*Xi) * Edx2/jr
X-direction
 α1x1=1+ (DIX*Yi) * Edy1/jr

 α2x2=1+ (DIX*Yi) * Edy2/j

204
FOOTING
X-direction
Axis YI α1X1 α2X2 αX* Q FI= αX**Q

4 -8.1 0.888 0.973 0.973 0.41 0.39893
3 -2.91 0.96 0.99 0.99 0.41 0.4059
2 0.29 1.003 1.001 1.003 0.41 0.41123
1 4.16 1.05 1.013 1.05 0.41 0.4305
Y-direction
Axis XI α1Y1 α2Y2 αY* Q FI= αY**Q

A -5.1 0.949 0.986 0.986 0.41 0.40426
B -2.47 0.975 0.993 0.993 0.41 0.40713
C 0.53 1.005 1.001 1.005 0.41 0.41205
D 3.33 1.032 1.008 1.032 0.41 0.42312
Basement FLOOR
X-direction
4 -8.1 0.948 1.032 1.032 2.64 2.72448
3 -2.91 0.981 1.011 1.011 2.64 2.66904
2 0.29 1.001 0.998 1.001 2.64 2.64264
1 4.16 1.026 0.983 1.02 2.64 2.6928
Y-direction
A -5.1 0.93 0.97 0.97 2.64 2.5608
B -2.47 0.96 0.98 0.98 2.64 2.5872
C 0.53 1.006 1.003 1.006 2.64 2.65584
D 3.33 1.04 1.01 1.04 2.64 2.7456

205
Ground FLOOR
X-direction
4 -8.1 0.955 1.04 1.04 5.01 5.2104
3 -2.91 0.983 1.014 1.01 5.01 5.0601
2 0.29 1.001 0.998 1.001 5.01 5.01501
1 4.16 1.022 0.979 1.022 5.01 5.12022
Y-direction

A -5.1 0.934 0.970 0.97 5.01 4.8597
B -2.47 0.968 0.985 0.98 5.01 4.9098
C 0.53 1.006 1.003 1.006 5.01 5.04006
D 3.33 1.042 1.018 1.04 5.01 5.2104
1st FLOOR
X-direction
4 -8.1 0.934 0.970 0.97 8.00 7.76
3 -2.91 0.968 0.985 0.98 8.00 7.84
2 0.29 1.006 1.003 1.006 8.00 8.048
1 4.16 1.042 1.018 1.04 8.00 8.32
Y-direction

A -5.1 0.934 0.970 0.97 8.00 7.76
B -2.47 0.968 0.985 0.98 8.00 7.84
C 0.53 1.006 1.003 1.006 8.00 8.048
D 3.33 1.042 1.018 1.04 8.00 8.32

206
2nd FLOOR
X-direction
4 -8.1 0.934 0.970 0.97 10.29 9.9813
3 -2.91 0.968 0.985 0.98 10.29 10.0842
2 0.29 1.006 1.003 1.006 10.29 10.35174
1 4.16 1.042 1.018 1.04 10.29 10.7016
Y-direction

A -5.1 0.934 0.970 0.97 10.29 9.9813
B -2.47 0.968 0.985 0.98 10.29 10.0842
C 0.53 1.006 1.003 1.006 10.29 10.35174
D 3.33 1.042 1.018 1.04 10.29 10.7016
3rd FLOOR
X-direction
4 -8.1 0.934 0.970 0.97 11.21 10.8737
3 -2.91 0.968 0.985 0.98 11.21 10.9858
2 0.29 1.006 1.003 1.006 11.21 11.27726
1 4.16 1.042 1.018 1.04 11.21 11.6584
Y-direction

A -5.1 0.934 0.970 0.97 11.21 10.8737
B -2.47 0.968 0.985 0.98 11.21 10.9858
C 0.53 1.006 1.003 1.006 11.21 11.27726
D 3.33 1.042 1.018 1.04 11.21 11.6584

207
4th FLOOR
X-direction
4 -8.1 0.956023 1.039601 1.039 14.87 15.449
3 -2.91 0.984201 1.014227 1.014 14.87 15.078
2 0.29 1.001574 0.998582 1.001 14.87 14.884
1 4.16 1.022586 0.979662 1.022 14.87 15.197
Y-direction
A -5.1 0.943 0.981 0.981 14.87 14.587
B -2.47 0.972 0.991 0.991 14.87 14.736
C 0.53 1.005 1.001 1.005 14.87 14.944
D 3.33 1.036 1.011 1.036 14.87 15.405
Roof FLOOR
X-direction
4 -8.1 0.946023 1.04039601 1.04 10.245 10.6548
3 -2.91 0.884201 1.0114227 1.01 10.245 10.34745
2 0.29 1.0101574 0.998582 1.01 10.245 10.34745
1 4.16 1.0422586 0.4579662 1.04 10.245 10.6548
Y-direction
A -5.1 0.9253 0.9181 0.92 10.245 9.4254
B -2.47 0.925872 0.4991 0.92 10.245 9.4254
C 0.53 1.004145 1.02001 1.02 10.245 10.4499
D 3.33 1.021436 1.01011 1.02 10.245 10.4499

208
Chapter Six
6. Frame Analysis
Objective
The following activities are included in the chapter:

o Loading calculation on each frame element
o Analysis of 3D Frame
o Sample analysis outputs are presented for investigation

209
6.1. Introduction
In designing the given structure the first and necessary task is to analyze the structure. To
perform the analysis process the loads on each element of the structure have to be known. Often,
it is the anticipation of the various loads that will be imposed on the structure that provides the
basic type of the structure that is to be designed. For examples, high-rise structures are subjected
to high lateral loadings caused by wind, and earthquakes.
In order to design a structure, it is therefore necessary to first specify the loads that act on the
structure.
In our case the loads on the structure are gravity loads (dead load, live load), and lateral loads.
Structural analysis is given an existing structure subjected to a certain load determine the internal
forces (axial, shear, flexural, torsional, or stresses), deflections, and verify that no unstable
failure can occur. Thus the basic structural requirements are strength (i.e. stresses should not
exceed critical values) and stiffness (i.e. deflections should be controlled).

210
6.2. Analysis Solution
Lateral loads
Lateral loads are mainly of wind and earth quake forces as discussed on the introduction part of
this chapter. In our case, from the two forces earthquake is the governing one as discussed on
chapter five. Therefore, the frame is analyzed for earthquake forces at each story.
Gravity loads
The gravity loads on the frame includes the dead load of each frame element and the load
transferred from slab onto the respective beams and this is determined under slab design.
Load combination
According EBCS-1995 we have six load combinations when considering earthquake loads and
these combos are given below.
o Comb 1: 1.35G𝑘 + 1.5𝑄𝐾 + P𝑑

o Comb 2: 0.75[Comb 1] + Ex
o Comb 3: 0.75[Comb 1] + E𝑦
o Comb 4: 0.75[P𝑑 ] + LL + DL (For Service)
o Comb 5: Comb 1 + Comb 2 + Comb 3 (Envelop)
The analysis is performed using ETABS. To do this the following procedure is employed.
The loads on the slab include dead load and live load and the values are determined on the
previous chapters. The load on the frame includes the dead load (self-weight of each structural
elements, and lateral loads. The self-weight of the frame skeletal will be determined by ETABS
by defining the material property and cross-section of each element. The next step is to load the
lateral load on each axis at each floor level on the program (ETABS).

211
ETABS V18 Input

 Modelling
Figure 17 Modelling of B+G+4

212
 Loading
o Wall Load
Figure 18 Wall Load Assign

213
o Live Load 2nd Floor Slab
Figure 19 Slab Live Load Assign 2nd floor

214
o Partition Load
Figure 20 Partition Wall Load Assign

215

216
Output Shear 2-2
Figure 21 Shear 2-2

217

218
Moment 3-3
Figure 22 Moment 3-3

219

220
Axial Load
Figure 23 Axial Load

221

222
Design Output
Figure 24 Design Output Area of Steel

223

224
Chapter Seven
7.Beam Design
7.1. Introduction
A beam is most often understood to be an element that supports load over space. However, the
key characteristic is that the beam resists load primarily in bending (flexure) and shear,
perpendicular to the length of the beam.
Most often we see horizontal beams. Yet, beams can be sloped, as for a gable roof, or even
vertical, to resist wind. Some beams are also columns, such as wall studs.
Any beam must have adequate strength, to resist failure, and stiffness, to prevent excessive
movement (deflection). Stiffness is the inverse of flexibility; greater stiffness results in less
flexibility.
In general, strength and stiffness of a beam is influenced much more by the depth (height) than
by width (thickness).
For a beam with rectangular cross section, bending (flexural) strength is a function of the square
(second power) of the depth (height). A similar, though more complicated, relation applies for I-
beam shapes.

225
According to EBCS-2, 1995 Section 3.7.8 the effective flange width in as given below:
 For interior beams (T-beams)
𝑙𝑒
𝑏𝑤 +
𝑏𝑒 ≤ {𝑐 5
𝑏𝑒𝑎𝑚 𝑠𝑝𝑎𝑐𝑖𝑛𝑔
𝑐
 For edge beams(Γ-Sections)
𝑙𝑒
𝑏𝑤 +
𝑏𝑒 ≤ { 10
1
𝑏𝑤 + ∗ (𝑐𝑙𝑒𝑎𝑟 𝑑𝑖𝑠𝑡𝑎𝑛𝑐𝑒 𝑡𝑜 𝑎𝑑𝑗𝑎𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑏𝑒𝑎𝑚)
2
Where:
𝑙𝑒 = 𝑒𝑓𝑓𝑒𝑐𝑡𝑖𝑣𝑒 𝑠𝑝𝑎𝑛 𝑙𝑒𝑛𝑔𝑡ℎ
𝑏𝑤 = 𝑤𝑖𝑑𝑡ℎ 𝑜𝑓 𝑡ℎ𝑒 𝑤𝑒𝑏
Depending on the location of the neutral axis and the sign of the moment, the behavior of T or
inverted L-section varies.
General procedure of beam design for flexure
 Compute the material strength and all design constants
 Geometry determination: including effective depth calculation for serviceability
 Loading and analysis
 Check the depth for flexure and shear or collapse limit state
 Determine the location of the neutral axis and check the behavior of the beam
 Check for double reinforcement of the web
 Calculate number of bars and decide bar arrangement
 Check available effective depth with the assumed effective depth and revise if the
available effective depth is less than the assumed effective depth
 Reinforcement detailing

226
7.2.Design Solution
Loading Calculation:
Dead load:
Total dead load on beam includes self-weight of the beam, wall load directly on the beam and
dead load transferred from each slab to the respective beams.
o Wall load directly on the beam is calculated as follows:
𝑃 = ℎ ∗ 𝑡 ∗ 𝛶𝐻𝐶𝐵 (𝐾𝑛/𝑚)
Where:
ℎ = ℎ𝑒𝑖𝑔ℎ𝑡 𝑜𝑓 𝑡ℎ𝑒 𝑤𝑎𝑙𝑙
𝑡 = 𝑡ℎ𝑖𝑐𝑘𝑛𝑒𝑠𝑠 𝑜𝑓 𝑡ℎ𝑒 𝑤𝑎𝑙𝑙
𝛶𝐻𝐶𝐵 = 𝑢𝑛𝑖𝑡 𝑤𝑒𝑖𝑔ℎ𝑡 𝑜𝑓 𝐻𝐶𝐵
o Dead and live load transferred from each panels: this load is determined under the
slab design.
So, by calculating all this loads and loading on each beams the modeling process is done on
ETABS and the design process is done based on the internal action forces obtained from the
result of modeling and analysis model.
Live load:
Live load on the beam is live load transferred from each slab to the respective beams

227
7.3.Design of beam through X-Direction
7.3.1. Design of beam for flexure
Sample of design of Floor beam along X-direction- on axis A

Consider the beam along axis A in the 2nd floor
Geometry
Cross-section
The size of each beam is given to be 350 x500mm
Effective depth
Assumptions:
Concrete cover for beam = 25 mm
Assumptions
𝛷𝑙𝑜𝑛𝑔 = 𝛷16
𝛷𝑠𝑡𝑟 = 𝛷8
One row of bars
D = d + d′
Φlong
d′ = cover + Φstr + , Assume one row of bars
2
16 mm
d′ = 25 mm + 8 mm + = 41mm
2
d = D − d′ = 500 mm − 41 mm = 459 mm
d = 459 mm

228
Analysis Result
The result of bending moment diagram for beam thought X-direction on Axis-A on Second floor
is as shown below using ETABS V18 after 3D analysis of the building is run.
20.71KNm
36.28 KN .m 46.31 KN .m 16.5 KN m 24.06 KN .m
26.5 KN m 12.53 KN m 13.57KNm

59.74 KN m
2 3 4
1
Figure 25 Bending Moment Diagram for beam on Axis-A of the second floor
97.12 KN 20.7 KN
28.54 KN 30.35 KN
1 2 3 4
- 102.82 KN 22.59 KN 16.87 KN
-15.64 KN
Figure 26 Shear Force Diagram for beam on Axis-A of the second floors
0.084KN.m 0.08KN.m 0.08KN.m

4.71 KNm
- 4.86KNm
-0.24 KNm -0.24KN.m -0.24KN.m
2 3 4
1
Figure 27 Torsional values for beam on Axis-A of the second floors

229
Flexural reinforcement designs
 fcd = 11.33 Mpa

 fyd = 260.87
 m = 28.78
 C1 = 0.0869
 C2 = 3003.04
 𝜌𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 0.00167
 𝜌𝑚𝑎𝑥 = 0.75 𝜌𝑏 = 0.019
1 4∗𝑀
 𝜌 = 2 ∗ (𝐶1 − √𝐶1 2 − 𝑏𝑤∗𝑑2𝑑∗𝐶 )
2
Design for span moments

Design for Span 1,2.
𝑴𝒅 = 𝟓𝟗. 𝟕𝟒 𝑲𝑵𝒎
Effective width:
 For ( T-Sections)
𝐿𝑒
bw + , 𝐿𝑒 = 𝑒𝑓𝑓𝑒𝑐𝑡𝑖𝑣𝑒 𝑠𝑝𝑎𝑛
be ≤ { 5
𝑐/𝑐 𝑠𝑝𝑎𝑐𝑖𝑛𝑔
5190
be ≤ {350 + 5
= 1388 𝑚𝑚
Use 𝑏 = 𝑏𝑒 = 1388 𝑚𝑚
ℎ𝑓 = 50𝑚𝑚
Determination of whether the section is singly or doubly reinforced

To determine the section of RC member whether it is singly or doubly reinforced there are
several methods those are:
1. By checking depth for flexure
2. By checking the actual steel ration with the maximum steel ratio
3. By comparing the moment capacity of the concrete with the design moment
From those alternatives we will see two of them below.

230
 Check depth for flexure:
Depth requirement for ultimate flexural strength of concrete compression stress capacity. If not
satisfied the strength, revise with new depth of use double reinforcement. From the above
diagram for bending moment,
Mmax
d=√
0.8 b fyd ρm (1 − 0.4 ρm)
Where:
 Msd =99.69 KN. m

 b = 1388 mm
 fcd = 11.33 Mpa
 fyd = 260.87
 m = 28.78
59.74 ∗ 106
d=√
0.8 ∗ 1388 ∗ 11.33 ∗ 0.019 ∗ 28.78(1 − 0.4 ∗ 0.019 ∗ 28.78)
d = 105.44 mm < dused = 459 mm ----- Safe!!
(It is Singly Reinforced)

231
Check if the section acts as T or rectangular:
 Depth of neutral Axis

Y = 0.8 X
N.A= X = ρmd
1 4 ∗ 59.74 ∗ 106
𝜌= ∗ (0.0869 − √0.0869 2 − ) = 0.0014
2 1388 ∗ (459)2 ∗ 3003.04

0.0014 < 0.00167
X = ρmd = 0.00167 * 28.78 * 459 = 22.06 mm

Y = 0.8 X = 0.8 * 22.06= 17.64 mm< 50 mm , so it is Rectangular
Flexural Reinforcement
𝜌 = 0.00167
𝐴𝑠 = 𝜌 ∗ 𝑏 ∗ 𝑑 = 0.00167 (1388 𝑚𝑚)(459𝑚𝑚)
𝐴𝑠 = 𝟏𝟎𝟔𝟑. 𝟗𝟒 𝒎𝒎𝟐
𝐴𝑠 1063.94 𝑚𝑚2
#Φ16 = = = 5.29 ≈ 6
𝑎𝑠 𝜋 ∗ 162
4
Therefore, provide #𝟔𝚽𝟏𝟔
Spacing of bars
Maximum number of bars on one row, n:
According to EBCS-2, 1995, Section 7.1.4,page 77.
The clear horizontal and vertical distance between bars shall be a list equal or larges of the
following values:
20mm
Spacing of bars horizontally ≥ { ϕmax
Maximum aggregate size + 5mm
For our case,
20mm
Spacing of bars horizontally ≥ { 16mm , 𝐔𝐬𝐞 𝟐𝟓𝐦𝐦
maximum aggregate size + 5mm

232
Therefore,
b = 16n + 16(n − 1) + 2 ∗ (cover + ϕstirrup )
350 = 16n + 16(n − 1) + 2 ∗ (25 + 8)
n=9
Therefore, we can arrange the bars on one row.

233
Design for Support moments

Design for support 1.
𝑀𝑑 = 36.28 𝐾𝑁𝑚
Check depth for flexure:
satisfied the strength, revise with new depth or use double reinforcement. From the above diagram
for bending moment,
Mmax
d=√
0.8 b fyd ρm (1 − 0.4 ρm)
Where:
 Msd =131.48 KN. m

 b = 350 mm
 fcd = 11.33 Mpa
 fyd = 260.87
 m = 28.78
36.28 ∗ 106
d=√
0.8 ∗ 350 ∗ 11.33 ∗ 0.019 ∗ 28.78(1 − 0.4 ∗ 0.019 ∗ 28.78)
d = 163.61 mm < dused = 459 mm ----- OK!!

234
𝐴𝑠 = 𝜌 ∗ 𝑏 ∗ 𝑑
1 4 ∗ 36.28 ∗ 106
𝜌= ∗ (0.0869 − √0.0869 2 − ) = 0.00195
2 350 ∗ (459)2 ∗ 3003.04

0.00167 < 0.00195 < 0.019
𝐴𝑠 = 𝜌 ∗ 𝑏 ∗ 𝑑 = 0.00195 (350 𝑚𝑚)(459𝑚𝑚)

𝐴𝑠 = 313.26 𝑚𝑚2
𝐴𝑠 313.26 𝑚𝑚2
#Φ20 = = = 0.56 ≈ 2
𝑎𝑠 𝜋 ∗ 202
4
Therefore, provide #𝟐𝚽𝟐𝟎
Spacing of bars
The clear horizontal and vertical distance between bars shall be a list equal or larges of the following
values:
20mm
For our case,
20mm
Spacing of bars horizontally ≤ { 16mm , 𝐔𝐬𝐞 𝟐𝟓𝐦𝐦
Therefore,
b = n + 20(n − 1) + 2 ∗ (cover + ϕstirrup )
350 = 16n + 16(n − 1) + 2 ∗ (25 + 8)
n=9

235
Design for at support 2.
𝑀𝑑 = 46.31 𝐾𝑁𝑚
Check depth for flexure:
satisfied the strength, revise with new depth or provide double reinforcement. From the above
diagram for bending moment,
Mmax
d=√
0.8 b fyd ρm (1 − 0.4 ρm)
Where:
 Msd =46.31 KN. m

 b = 350 mm
 fcd = 11.33 Mpa
 fyd = 260.87
 m = 28.78
46.31 ∗ 106
d=√
0.8 ∗ 350 ∗ 11.33 ∗ 0.019 ∗ 28.78(1 − 0.4 ∗ 0.019 ∗ 28.78)
d = 184.85 mm > dused = 459 mm ----- OK!!

236
𝐴𝑠 = 𝜌 ∗ 𝑏 ∗ 𝑑
1 4 ∗ 46.31 ∗ 106
𝜌= ∗ (0.0869 − √0.0869 2 − ) = 0.00225
2 350 ∗ (459)2 ∗ 3003.04

0.00167 < 0.00225 < 0.019
𝐴𝑠 = 𝜌 ∗ 𝑏 ∗ 𝑑 = 0.00225 (350 𝑚𝑚)(459𝑚𝑚)

𝐴𝑠 = 361.46 𝑚𝑚2
𝐴𝑠 361.46 𝑚𝑚2
#Φ20 = = = 1.15 ≈ 2
𝑎𝑠 𝜋 ∗ 202
4
Therefore, provide #𝟐𝚽𝟐𝟎
Spacing of bars
The clear horizontal and vertical distance between bars shall be a list equal or larges of the following
values:
20mm
For our case,
20mm
Spacing of bars horizontally ≤ { 16mm , 𝐔𝐬𝐞 𝟐𝟓𝐦𝐦
Therefore,
b = n + 20(n − 1) + 2 ∗ (cover + ϕstirrup )
350 = 16n + 16(n − 1) + 2 ∗ (25 + 8)
n=9

237
Within similar fashion we can summarize the reinforcement work for the others.
Table 24 Summary of Support Reinforcement
Support 1 2 3 4
Support Moment 36.28 46.31 16.5 24.06
Check depth
𝐝𝐮𝐬𝐞𝐝 (mm) 459 459 459 459
𝐝𝐚𝐜𝐭𝐮𝐚𝐥 (mm) 163.61 184.85 108.65 133.23
Yes: Singly Yes: Singly Yes: Singly Yes: Singly
𝐝𝐮𝐬𝐞𝐝 > 𝐝𝐚𝐜𝐭𝐮𝐚𝐥
Reinforced Reinforced Reinforced Reinforced
𝛒𝐚𝐜𝐭𝐮𝐚𝐥 0.00195 0.00225 0.00167 0.00167
𝑨𝒔 (mm2) 313.26 361.46 268.28 268.28
Provide #𝟐𝚽𝟐𝟎 #𝟐𝚽𝟐𝟎 #𝟐𝚽𝟐𝟎 #𝟐𝚽𝟐𝟎

238
7.3.2. Beam design for Shear

Shear force is present in beams where there is a change in bending moment along the span. Shear
force in beam generally developed in combination with bending moment. Beams sections are
subjected to shear force in addition to flexural action.
Shear is resisted by the combination of the action of the following:
o Shear resistance of concrete in compression zone
o Shear reinforcement (stirrup)
o Dowel action in tension bars across crack
o Aggregate interlocking across inclined tension zone
Resistance to a diagonal tension is obtained as the sum of the resistance of the web reinforcement
and the concrete section.
Critical section for shear is at a distance d from the face of the supports. Sections closer than d
shall be designed for the shear at d.
In order to prevent diagonal compression failure in concrete, the shear resistance of a section,
𝑉𝑅𝑑 shall not be less than the design shear force developed in a member due to factored design
load.
𝑉𝑅𝑑 = 0.25𝑓𝑐𝑑 𝑏𝑤 𝑑
If the design shear is greater than the shear resistance of the section we should change cross-
section of beam or use high quality material to increase concrete shear resisting capacity.
EBCS provision for shear design of beam
EBCS-2/1995, Section 7.2.1.2
𝐴𝑣 𝑑𝑓𝑦𝑑
𝑆=
𝑉𝑠
𝑉𝑠 = 𝑉𝑑 − 𝑉𝑐
𝑉𝑐 = 0.25𝑓𝑐𝑡𝑑 𝐾1 𝐾2 𝑏𝑤 𝑑
Where:
𝐾1 = 1 + 50𝜌 ≤ 2.0
𝐾2 = 1.6 − 𝑑 ≥ 1 , 𝑑 𝑖𝑛 𝑚. For members were more than 50% of the bottom
reinforcement is curtailed, 𝐾2 = 1
𝐴𝑠
𝜌=
𝑏𝑤 𝑑

239
𝐴𝑠 = area of the tensile reinforcement anchored beyond the intersection of the steel and the line
of a possible 450 crack starting from the edge of the section.(EBCS-2).
As= the area of tension reinforcement extending not less than 𝑑 + 𝑙𝑏,𝑛𝑒𝑡 beyond the section
considered. (Euro Code -2)
The maximum spacing based on EBCS-2/1995 Section 7.2.1.2(2)

 The maximum spacing 𝑆𝑚𝑎𝑥 between stirrups, in the longitudinal direction, shall be
given below:
2
o If 𝑉𝑠𝑑 ≤ 𝑉
3 𝑅𝑑
0.5𝑑
𝑆𝑚𝑎𝑥 ≤ {
300𝑚𝑚
2
o If 𝑉𝑠𝑑 > 𝑉
3 𝑅𝑑
0.3𝑑
𝑆𝑚𝑎𝑥 ≤ {
200𝑚𝑚
General design procedure of shear design for beam
 Determine the shear strength of concrete in both compression and tension zone
 Determine design shear force from analysis result
 If 𝑉𝑑 ≤ 𝑉𝑐 provide minimum reinforcement
2
 If 𝑉𝑐 < 𝑉𝑑 < 𝑉𝑅𝑑 : compare 𝑉𝑑 with 3 𝑉𝑅𝑑 ,
2
o If 𝑉𝑑 < 3 𝑉𝑅𝑑 :
Calculate resistance of concrete plus minimum shear reinforcement and then

design for shear beyond minimum shear resistance capacity value

240
0.5𝑑 ≤ 300𝑚𝑚
𝑆𝑚𝑎𝑥 = 𝑚𝑖𝑛 { 𝐴𝑣 𝑑𝑓𝑦𝑘
0.4𝑏𝑤
Spacing for extra shear reinforcement from minimum reinforcement,
𝑆2 =
𝑉𝑠
𝑉𝑠,𝑚𝑖𝑛 =
𝑆2
2
o If 𝑉𝑑 ≥ 3 𝑉𝑅𝑑
0.3𝑑 ≤ 200𝑚𝑚
𝑆𝑚𝑎𝑥,3 = 𝑚𝑖𝑛 { 𝐴𝑣 𝑑𝑓𝑦𝑘
0.4𝑏𝑤
𝑉𝑠,𝑚𝑖𝑛 =
𝑆𝑚𝑎𝑥,3
Calculate 𝑉𝑐 + 𝑉𝑠,𝑚𝑖𝑛 then beyond this point design for shear
𝑆3 =
𝑉𝑠
Note: This method of shear reinforcement determination is economical, but it is difficult for
workability. So, we preferred to provide the maximum shear reinforcement along the full length
of the span.
Design of Beam for shear at the right of support - 1
𝐶𝑜𝑙𝑢𝑚𝑒𝑛𝑛 𝑤𝑖𝑑𝑡ℎ
Critical shear location = (𝑑 + )
2
Critical shear location = 459 + 400/2 = 659 mm = 0.659 m
Using the similarity of triangles, we find the values as below.

241
97.12KN
X 5.19 - X
-102.82 KN
5.19m
𝑋 5.19−𝑋
= , 𝑋 = 2.66 Then, 5.19 − 𝑋 = 2.53
102.82 97.12
97.12 KN
0.659 m
102.82 KN
67.36 KN
2.66 2.53
5.19 m
From this the max shears for support 1.

2.66 = 90.96
2.66 − 0.659 = 2.001

The maximum shear at the critical location will be 68.425 KN

242
Shear capacity
 Diagonal shear capacity
𝑉𝑟𝑑 = 0.25𝑓𝑐𝑑 𝑏𝑤 𝑑
Where:
 fcd = 11.33MPa
𝑉𝑟𝑑 = 0.25 ∗ 11.33 ∗ 350 ∗ 459
𝐕𝐫𝐝 = 𝟒𝟓𝟓. 𝟎𝟒𝟏 𝐊𝐍 > Vsc ……….Nice!!
Safe against diagonal compression failure
 Concrete shear capacity

𝑉𝑐 = 0.25𝑓𝑐𝑡𝑑 𝐾1 𝐾2 𝑏𝑤 𝑑
Where:
 fctd = 1.03MPa
 𝑏 = 350
 d = Effective depth = 459 mm
313.26
 𝐾1 = 1 + 50𝜌 ≤ 2.0 , 𝜌 = 𝐴𝑆/𝑏𝑑 = 350∗459 =0.00194
 𝐾1 = 1 + 50 ∗ 0.00194 = 1.097 ≤ 2.0 ------- OK!

 𝐾2 = 1.6 − 𝑑 ≥ 1 , 𝑑 𝑖𝑛 𝑚. = 1.6- 0.459 = 1.141 ≥ 1------- OK!
 𝑉𝑐 = 0.25𝑓𝑐𝑡𝑑 𝐾1 𝐾2 𝑏𝑤 𝑑
 𝑉𝑐 = 0.25 ∗ 1.03 ∗ 1.097 ∗ 1.141 ∗ 350 ∗ 459
 𝑽𝒄 = 𝟓𝟏. 𝟕𝟕𝑲𝑵 < Vsc ………... Not Ok!!
There for provide minimum reinforcement.
𝑽𝒔𝒄 = 𝑽𝒄 + 𝑽𝒔
𝑽𝒔 = 𝑽𝒔𝒄 − 𝑽𝒄
𝑽𝒔 = 𝟔𝟖. 𝟒𝟐𝟓 − 𝟓𝟏. 𝟕𝟕 = 16.65 KN
There for provide minimum reinforcement.

243
Spacing of shear Reinforcements
𝑉𝑠 = 𝑉𝑑 − 𝑉𝑐 = 𝟔𝟖. 𝟒𝟐𝟓 − 𝟓𝟏. 𝟕𝟕 = 16.65 KN

𝜋82
𝐴𝑣 𝑑𝑓𝑦𝑑 2 ∗ 4 ∗ 459 ∗ 260.87
𝑆2 = = = 722.6 𝑚𝑚
𝑉𝑠 16.65 ∗ 1000
𝒄
Provide 𝝓𝟖 𝒄 𝟒𝟓𝟎 𝒎𝒎 OR!
2
 If 𝑉𝑐 < 𝑉𝑑 < 𝑉𝑅𝑑 : compare 𝑉𝑑 with 3 𝑉𝑅𝑑 ,
2 2
𝑉 = ∗ 455.041 kN = 303.36 kN
3 𝑅𝑑 3
2
𝑉𝑑 = 68.425 kN < 𝑉𝑅𝑑 = 203.37 kN
3
Calculate resistance of concrete plus minimum shear reinforcement and then design for shear
beyond minimum shear resistance capacity value
𝑉𝑠 = 𝑉𝑑 − 𝑉𝑐 = 68.425 kN − 51.77 kN = 16.65 kN
0.5𝑑 = 0.5 ∗ 459 = 229.5 𝑚𝑚 ≤ 350𝑚𝑚
𝜋82
𝑆𝑚𝑎𝑥 = 𝑚𝑖𝑛 { 𝐴𝑣 𝑓𝑦𝑘 2 ∗ 4 ∗ 350
= = 251.2
0.4𝑏𝑤 0.4 ∗ 350
𝑆𝑚𝑎𝑥 = 229.5 𝑚𝑚
𝑆1 = 𝑆𝑚𝑎𝑥 = 229.5 𝑚𝑚
Provide 𝝓𝟖 𝒄/𝒄 𝟐𝟐𝟎 𝒎𝒎
Spacing for extra shear reinforcement from minimum reinforcement,
Similar procedure is used for the design of other beams.

244
Within similar fashion we can summarize the design of shear for the others.
Table 7.3 Summary of shear Reinforcement
Shear Reinforcement
Support 1 2 3 4
Right left Right Left Right Left
𝑽𝒔𝒅 (KN)
-102.82 97.12 -15.64 20.7 22.59 28.54
Critical shear location
0.659 0.659 0.659 0.659 0.659 0.659
(m)
𝑽𝒔𝒄 (KN) 68.425 77.39 62.46 57.17 68.74 73.68
Diagonal shear
𝟒𝟓𝟓. 𝟎𝟒𝟏 𝟒𝟓𝟓. 𝟎𝟒𝟏 𝟒𝟓𝟓. 𝟎𝟒𝟏 𝟒𝟓𝟓. 𝟎𝟒𝟏 𝟒𝟓𝟓. 𝟎𝟒𝟏 𝟒𝟓𝟓. 𝟎𝟒𝟏
capacity (𝐕𝐫𝐝 )
Yes: No need of
𝑽𝒓𝒅 > 𝑽𝒔𝒄 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
reinforcement
Concrete shear
𝟓𝟏. 𝟕𝟕 𝟓𝟏. 𝟕𝟕 𝟓𝟏. 𝟕𝟕 𝟓𝟏. 𝟕𝟕 𝟓𝟏. 𝟕𝟕 𝟓𝟏. 𝟕𝟕
capacity (𝑽𝒄 )
Yes: Provide
𝑽𝒔𝒄 > 𝑽𝒄 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Reinforcement
𝑽𝒔 = 𝑽𝒔𝒄 − 𝑽𝒄 16.55 25.62 10.69 5.4 16.97 21.91
Ø8 Ø8
Ø8 c/c220 Ø8 c/c220 Ø8 c/c220
Spacing (mm) Ø8 c/c220 mm c/c220 c/c220
mm mm mm
mm mm

245
7.3.3. Design for Torsion
Design of members for torsion in accordance with EBCS-2, Section 4.6, Page 47- 49
Where the static equilibrium of a structure relies on the torsional resistance of individual
members, that is, in the case of equilibrium torsion, EBCS-2 stipulates that a full design for
torsion is necessary. The torsional resistance of members is calculated on the basis of an
equivalent thin-walled section (i.e. the truss analogy). As for shear, the strut inclination angle can
have any value in the range 22 ° ≤ 𝜃 ≤ 68°.
The thickness of the equivalent wall is given by equation given bellow, but must not be less than
twice the cover to the longitudinal steel. In the case of hollow members, the equivalent wall
thickness should not exceed the actual wall thickness.
𝑡 = Ag /𝑢
Where: Ag is the gross cross-sectional area of the member and
u is the length of the perimeter
For sections of complex (solid) shape, such as T-sections, the torsional resistance can be
calculated by dividing the section into individual elements of simple (say, rectangular) shape.
The torsional resistance of the section is equal to the sum of the capacities of the individual
elements, each modeled as an equivalent thin-walled section.
Members with pure torsion
For members with pure equilibrium torsion, EBCS-2 requires that:
(a) The applied ultimate torque ,T, does not exceeds the torsion capacity, as dictated by the
quantities of stirrup and longitudinal reinforcement presents: and
(b) The applied ultimate torque, T, does not exceed the level that would cause the crushing of
the compressive struts, Tw.
 In order to prevent diagonal compression failure in the concrete, the torsional resistance
TRD = 0.8 ∗ fcd ∗ Aef ∗ hef
 The torsional resistance of concrete for torque Tc shall be taken as:

246
Tc = 1.2 ∗ fctd ∗ Aef ∗ hef

Aef = Area enclosed with in the center line of the thin
−wall cros section including hollow areas (Aef = XO ∗ YO )
A
hef = equivalent tickness of the section hef ≤
u
≤ the actual thickness of the wall where u is outer perimeter and A the total area of
the croos sectino enclosed by the outer dperimeter, include inner hollow area.
 The critical section for torsion is at the face of the column
Figure 7.1 Equivalent Hallow section

Design of torsional Reinforcement
Torsional reinforcement in the form of closed links and longitudinal reinforcement is required to
carry the excess torque whenever the applied tongue exceeds the concrete resistance given by the
above equilibrium.
The volume of longitudinal torsional reinforcement shall be chosen to be equal to the volume the
links (closed stirrups).
2 ∗ Aef ∗ fyd ∗ As 2 ∗ Aef ∗ fyd ∗ Al
Tef = OR Tef =
𝑠 𝑢ef
Where ∶ As is the cross sectional area of stirrups in the effective wall.
Al is the cross sectional area of longitudinal in the effective wall
Uef is the mean perimeter enclosing the area Aef
Maximum torsion throught out the sectionis Tsd = 4.86 KN. m

247
𝐶𝑜𝑙𝑢𝑚𝑒𝑛𝑛 𝑤𝑖𝑑𝑡ℎ
Critical shear location = (𝑑 + )
2
Critical shear location = 459 + 400/2 = 659 mm = 0.659 m

 In order to prevent diagonal compression failure in the concrete, the torsional resistance
TRD = 0.8 ∗ fcd ∗ Aef ∗ hef

fcd = 11.33 𝑚𝑝𝑎
𝐵 = 350 𝑚𝑚
𝐷 = 500 𝑚𝑚
Equivalent thickness:
𝐴 350 ∗ 500
hef ≤ = = 102.94𝑚𝑚
𝑢 2 ∗ (350 + 500)
Equivalent Area:
Aef = 𝑏 ′ ∗ ℎ′ = (350 − 102.94) ∗ (500 − 102.94) = 98,097.64 𝑚𝑚 ² = 0.098 𝑚²
TRD = 0.8 ∗ 11.33 ∗ 0.098 ∗ 102.94
TRD = 91.43 𝐾𝑁. 𝑚 > Tsd − − − −𝑂𝐾‼
 The torsional resistance of concrete for torque Tc shall be taken as:
Tc = 1.2 ∗ fctd ∗ Aef ∗ hef

Tc = 1.2 ∗ 1.03 ∗ 0.098 ∗ 102.94
Tc = 12.46 𝐾𝑁. 𝑚 > Tsd − − − −𝑂𝐾‼
The section we provided is adequate.
Reinforcement Details
Refer Appendix - 2

248
Chapter Eight
8. Column Design
8.1. Introduction
RCC Column
A column forms a very important component of a structure. Columns support beams which in
turn support walls and slabs. It should be realized that the failure of a column results in the
collapse of the structure. The design of a column should therefore receive importance.
Supporting the slabs is the main function of the columns… Such slabs are called Simply
Supported Slabs. Simply supported slabs could be either one way slab or a two-way slab. It
depends on the dimensions of the slab.
Reinforced Cement Concrete Column Plan and Section
A column is defined as a compression member, the effective length of which

exceeds three times the least lateral dimension. Compression members whose
lengths do not exceed three times the least lateral dimension, may be made of
plain concrete.

249
In this article, we are going to discuss in detail the basis of classification of columns and
different types of reinforcement required for a certain type of column.
A column may be classified based on different criteria such as:
1. Based on shape
 Rectangle
 Square
 Circular
 Polygon
2. Based on slenderness ratio
 Short column,
 Long column,
3. Based on type of loading
 Axially loaded column
 A column subjected to axial load and uniaxial bending
 A column subjected to axial load and biaxial bending
4. Based on pattern of lateral reinforcement
 Tied columns
 Spiral columns
Minimum eccentricity
Emin > l/500 + D/30 >20
Where, l = unsupported length of column in ‘mm’
D = lateral dimensions of column
Types of Reinforcements for columns and their requirements
 Longitudinal Reinforcement
o Minimum area of cross-section of longitudinal bars must be at least 0.8% of gross
section area of the column.
o Maximum area of cross-section of longitudinal bars must not exceed 6% of the
gross cross-section area of the column.

250
The bars should not be less than 12mm in diameter.

 Minimum number of longitudinal bars must be four in rectangular column and 6 in circular
column.
 Spacing of longitudinal bars measures along the periphery of a column should not exceed
300mm.
Transverse reinforcement
 It may be in the form of lateral ties or spirals.
 The diameter of the lateral ties should not be less than 1/4th of the diameter of the largest
longitudinal bar and in no case less than 6mm.
The pitch of lateral ties should not exceed
 Least lateral dimension

 16 x diameter of longitudinal bars (small)
 300mm
Helical Reinforcement
The diameter of helical bars should not be less than 1/4th the diameter of largest longitudinal and
not less than 6mm.
The pitch should not exceed (if helical reinforcement is allowed);
 75mm
 1/6th of the core diameter of the column
Pitch should not be less than,
 25mm
 3 x diameter of helical bar
Pitch should not exceed (if helical reinforcement is not allowed)
Least lateral dimension
 16 x diameter of longitudinal bar (smaller)
 300mm

251
8.1.1. Introduction
Definition and purpose
Reinforced concrete column is a structural member designed to carry mainly compressive loads
although they may have to resist bending forces. Member carrying mainly of axial load may be
vertical, horizontal or inclined. When a member carrying mainly axial load is vertical, it is
termed as columns while if it is inclined or horizontal, it is termed as a strut. Columns carry loads
from slabs or beams to the foundation. Although they are mainly subjected to axial compression
forces, in many cases columns are subjected to bending moments about one or both axes of the
cross section due to eccentric loading or transverse loading. In building structures, a reinforced
concrete column are subjected to axial force and bending moment which may be due to end
restraint arising from monolithic placement of floor beams and columns or due to eccentricity
from imperfect alignment. Because of the occurrence of these moments, the axial load capacity
of columns, which they are intended for, decreases substantially. Interaction diagrams are usually
used to describe the interaction between moment and axial load in a column, and determine the
failure loads.
The maximum moments could happen at the ends as in columns of sway frames or somewhere at
the span of the column in between the two ends as in slender columns of non-sway frames.
A great number of structural failures are due to column failure. The strength of a column
depends on many factors including the following:
 The strength of the material
 Shape and size of the cross section
 Length
 The degree of positional and directional restraints at its end

252
8.1.2. Design of Isolated Column
In designing of columns we must study for each and every individual column. But hear to show
the procedure we select one column for design. However, before going to design let’s identify
whether they are sway or non-sway along both X and Y axis’s depending on their sensitivity to
secondary effect.
According to EBCS 2, 1995 Article 4.4.4.2, Page 33. A frame may be classified as non-sway if
its response to in plane horizontal is sufficiently rigid for it to be acceptability accurate to neglect
any additional reactions arising from horizontal displacement of its nodes. If a frame is classified
as sway, the effect of the horizontal displacements of its nodes should be taken in to
consideration in the design procedure. A frame may be classified as non-sway for a given load
case if the critical load ratio is fulfilled.
Finally after we finish the designing of each and individual columns we can group each other in
detailing.
Design of selected column located on Axis A-1.
A. Determination of Story buckling load, 𝐍𝐜𝐫 , EBCS-2,1995 section 4.4.12.

The most difficult part of design of slender columns of sway frames according to EBCS-2, 1995
is the determination of the story buckling load. This is because of the introduction of the concept
of substitute beam-column frame in order to use a more accurate method of determination of the
critical buckling load which considers the effect of the stiffness of the reinforcing steel.
The substitute beam-column frame is a propped half portal made of substitute columns and
beams as shown in figure below. According to EBCS-2, 1995 section 4.4.12(1), the buckling
load of a story may be assumed to be equal to that of the substitute beam-column frame. EBCS-
2, 1995 section 4.4.12(4) states that the equivalent reinforced areas, 𝐴𝑠,𝑡𝑜𝑡 , in the substitute
column are obtained by designing the column at each floor level to carry the story design axial
load and magnified sway moment at the critical section.

253
𝜋 2 𝐸𝐼𝑒
𝑁𝑐𝑟 =
𝐿𝑒 2
Where:
𝐸𝐼𝑒 = the effective stiffness of the substitute column
𝐿𝑒 =the effective length
𝐸𝐼𝑒 = 0.2𝐸𝑐 𝐼𝑐 + 𝐸𝑠 𝐼𝑠
Where:
𝐸𝑐 = 1100𝑓𝑐𝑑
𝐸𝑠 =modulus of elasticity of steel
𝐼𝑐 ,𝐼𝑠 : are the moments of inertia of the concrete and reinforcement sections,
respectively, of the substitute column, with respect to the centroid of the concrete
section.
Or alternatively,
𝑀𝑏𝑎𝑙
𝐸𝐼𝑒 = ≥ 0.4𝐸𝑐 𝐼𝑐
1
(𝑟 )
𝑏𝑎𝑙
Where:
𝑀𝑏𝑎𝑙 is the balanced moment capacity of the substitute column
𝑀𝑏𝑎𝑙 = µ𝑏𝑎𝑙 𝑓𝑐𝑑 𝐴𝑐
1
is the curvature at balanced load and may be taken as:
𝑟𝑏𝑎𝑙
1 5
= ( ) ∗ 10−3
𝑟𝑏𝑎𝑙 𝑑
The equivalent reinforcement areas, 𝐴𝑠,𝑡𝑜𝑡 , in substitute column to be used for calculating 𝐼𝑠
and 𝑀𝑏𝑎𝑙 may be obtained by designing the substitute column at each floor level to carry the
story design axial load and amplified sway moment at the critical section.
The equivalent column dimensions of the substitute column may be taken as shown in figure
below, in case of rectangular columns. Circular columns may be replaced by square columns of

254
the same cross-sectional area. Concrete cover and bar arrangement in the substitute columns
shall be taken to be the same as those of the actual columns.
Figure 8.1 Substitute frame model According to EBCS-2/1995
B. Determination of effective buckling length, 𝑳𝒆𝒇𝒇 , EBCS-2,1995 section 4.4.7

The effective length of RC column in a given plane is given by the following approximate
equations provided that 𝛼1 and 𝛼2 are not greater than 10. For higher values more accurate
methods must be used.
o For non-sway mode:
𝛼𝑚 + 0.4
𝐿𝑒𝑓𝑓 = ( ) 𝐿 ≥ 0.7𝐿
𝛼𝑚 + 0.8
o For sway mode:
7.5 + 4(𝛼1 + 𝛼2 ) + 1.6𝛼1 𝛼2

𝐿𝑒𝑓𝑓 = √ ∗ 𝐿 ≥ 1.15𝐿
7.5 + 𝛼1 + 𝛼2
Or conservatively,
𝐿𝑒𝑓𝑓 = √1 + 0.8𝛼𝑚 ∗ 𝐿 ≥ 1.15𝐿
𝛼1 + 𝛼2
𝛼𝑚 =
2
Where 𝛼1 and 𝛼2 are stiffness coefficients calculated as shown below:

255
∑ 𝐾𝑐𝑜𝑙𝑢𝑚𝑛
𝛼=
∑ 𝐾𝑏𝑒𝑎𝑚
𝐾1 + 𝐾𝐶
𝛼1 =
𝐾11 + 𝐾12
𝐾 +𝐾
𝛼2 = 𝐾 2 +𝐾𝐶
21 22
Where:
𝐸𝐼
𝐾1 and 𝐾2 are column stiffness coefficients ( 𝐿 )
𝐾𝐶 is the stiffness of coefficient of the column being

considered
𝐾𝑖𝑗 is the effective beam stiffness coefficient
𝐸𝐼
1∗ , 𝑓𝑜𝑟 𝑜𝑝𝑝𝑜𝑠𝑖𝑡𝑒 𝑒𝑛𝑑 𝑒𝑙𝑎𝑠𝑡𝑖𝑐𝑎𝑙𝑙𝑦 𝑜𝑟 𝑟𝑖𝑔𝑖𝑑𝑙𝑦 𝑟𝑒𝑠𝑡𝑟𝑎𝑖𝑛𝑒𝑑
𝐿
𝐾𝑖𝑗 = 𝐸𝐼
0.5 ∗ , 𝑓𝑜𝑟 𝑜𝑝𝑝𝑜𝑠𝑖𝑡𝑒 𝑒𝑛𝑑 𝑓𝑟𝑒𝑒 𝑡𝑜 𝑟𝑜𝑡𝑎𝑡𝑒
𝐿
{ 0 , 𝑓𝑜𝑟 𝑐𝑎𝑛𝑡𝑖𝑙𝑒𝑣𝑒𝑟 𝑏𝑒𝑎𝑚.
When calculating, only members properly framed into the end of the column in the appropriate
plane of bending shall be considered.
According to EBCS-2, 1995:
o When the connection between a column and its base is not designed to resist other than
nominal moment 𝛼 at such positions shall be taken as 10.
o If a base is designed to resist the column moment, 𝛼 may be taken as 1.0
The rationale behind the recommendation is that no support in reality can be fully fixed or
pinned.

256
 Sample design of column 2-B Second Floor

Calculation of α1, α2, αm, Le, s, Ac and Ic
1. The effective buckling length Le of a column in a given plane may be obtained From the
following approximate equations; provided that the sections below is complied with,
A. Non-sway mode: Le/L= αm+0.4/ αm +0.8 ≥0
B. Sway mode: Le/L= √1+ 0.8 αm ≥ 1.15 co αm conservatively
2. Stiffness coefficient α1 and α2 are obtained from:
α1= ΣKc1/ΣKb1
α2 = ΣKc2/ΣKb2
αm = (α1+α2)/2
Where: Kc1 and Kc2 are column stiffness coefficients (EI/L)
Kb2 and Kb2 are the effective beam stiffness coefficients (EI/L
 Column dimension from foundation – 4th = 400 * 400(mm),
Beam dimension = 350 * 500(mm)
Moment of inertia
 Beam Ib = 5003*300/12 = 3.12*109 mm4
 Column
I = 5004/12 = 5.2 *109mm4(from foundation -2nd)
I= 5004/12 = 5.2*109mm4(from 3rd-8th)
Stiffness coefficient
 COLUMN
Kc = I/L = 5.2*109mm4/2500mm = 2.08 *106 (foundation)
Kc = I/L = 5.2*109mm4/3400mm = 1.5 *106 (for basement, Ground 1st,&2nd )
Kc = I/L = 5.2*109mm4/3400mm = 1.5*106 (3rd - 4th)
 BEAM
Kb = I/L = 3.12*109mm4/5190mm = 6.01*104
Kb = I/L= 3.12*109mm4/3200mm = 8.01 *104
Kb = I/L = 3.12*109mm4/3870mm = 8.06 *104
Kb = I/L = 3.12*109mm4/3870mm = 8.06 *104

257
2B Second Floor
𝑏ℎ3 /12
𝐾11 = ( )
𝐿
Dimensions in x-x direction: Dimensions in y-y direction:

Depth Width Depth Width
B1 = 0.50 0.35 B1 = 0.50 0.35
B2 = 0.50 0.35 B2 = 0.50 0.35
B3 = 0.50 0.35 B3 = 0.50 0.35
B4 = 0.50 0.35 B4 = 0.50 0.35
C1 = 0.40 0.40 C1 = 0.40 0.40
C2 = 0.40 0.40 C2 = 0.40 0.40
C3 = 0.40 0.40 C3 = 0.40 0.40
Lb1 = 3.00 Lb1 = 3.00
Lb2 = 2.81 Lb2 = 2.81
Lc1 = 3.45 Lc1 = 3.45
Lc2 = 3.00 Lc2 = 3.00
Lc3 = 3.45 Lc3 = 3.45
1   2 I c1 Lc1  I c 3 Lc 3
m  2 
2 I b 3 Lb 3  I b 4 Lb 4
I c1 Lc1  I c 2 Lc 2
1 
I b1 Lb1  I b 2 Lb 2

258
Analysis Result From ETABS
Axial Mom. x-x Mom y-y

970.88 7.42 34.58
962.9 -5.01 -24.13
About x-x direction. About y-y direction.
Ic1 = 0.00213 Ic1 = 0.00213 Ic1 = 0.00213 Ic1 = 0.00213
Ic2 = 0.00213 Ic3 = 0.00213 Ic2 = 0.00213 Ic3 = 0.00213
Ib1 = 0.00365 Ib3 = 0.00365 Ib1 = 0.00365 Ib3 = 0.00365
Ib2 = 0.00365 Ib4 = 0.00365 Ib2 = 0.00365 Ib4 = 0.00365
 0.529  0.492  0.529  0.492

m 0.511 m 0.511

259
Effective Buckling length
 m  0 .4
Le  L  0 .7 L
 m  0 .8
𝟎. 𝟓𝟏𝟏 + 𝟎. 𝟒
𝑳𝒆𝟐 = = 𝟐. 𝟑𝟗𝟕
𝟎. 𝟓𝟏𝟏 + 𝟎. 𝟖
𝟎. 𝟓𝟏𝟏 + 𝟎. 𝟒
𝑳𝒆𝟐 = = 𝟐. 𝟑𝟗𝟕
𝟎. 𝟓𝟏𝟏 + 𝟎. 𝟖
Ig
𝑖 = 𝑅𝑎𝑑𝑖𝑢𝑠 𝑜𝑓 𝐺𝑦𝑟𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛 = Ag
𝑏ℎ3
𝑖𝑔 = = 0.002
12
𝐴𝑔 = 0.4 ∗ 0.4 = 0.16
𝑖 = 𝟎. 𝟏𝟏𝟓
The Slenderness Ratio
𝐿𝑒 2.397 
I= = 0.115 = 20.759 Not Slender because I < So we ignore secondary effect
𝑖
Limits of Slenderness:
 M1 
  50  25 
𝑀1  M2 
= 𝑖𝑓 𝑀𝑜𝑚𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑋 − 𝑋 − 2 > 𝑀𝑜𝑚𝑛𝑒𝑡 𝑋 − 𝑋 − 1
𝑀2
𝑀2
= 𝑖𝑓 𝑀𝑜𝑚𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑋 − 𝑋 − 2 < 𝑀𝑜𝑚𝑛𝑒𝑡 𝑋 − 𝑋 − 1
𝑀1
−5.01
  50 − 25 ( 7.42 ) = 66.88

260

261
Calculation of eccentricity
Total eccentricity
Calculate Eccentricities in the x-x Direction
etot  ee  ea  e2
7.42 −5.01
𝑒01 = 𝑀𝑖𝑛 ( , ) = −0.0052
970.88 962.9
7.42 −5.01
𝑒02 = 𝑀𝑎𝑥 ( , ) = 0.0076
970.88 962.9
𝑒𝑒 = 𝑒0 = 0.0031
𝐿𝑒
𝑒𝑎 = ≥ 200𝑚𝑚
300
2.397
𝑒𝑎 = 𝑀𝑎𝑥 ( , 0.02𝑚)
300
𝑒𝑎 = 0.02
𝑒2 = 0.02
𝑒𝑇𝑜𝑡 = 0.0031 + 0.02 + 0.02 = 𝟎. 𝟎𝟒𝟑𝟏
Calculate Eccentricities in the y-y Direction
etot  ee  ea  e2
34.58 −24.13
𝑒01 = 𝑀𝑖𝑛 ( , ) = −0.0251
970.88 962.9
34.58 −24.13
𝑒02 = 𝑀𝑎𝑥 ( , ) = 0.0356
970.88 962.9
𝑒𝑒 = 𝑒0 = 0.0142
𝐿𝑒
𝑒𝑎 = ≥ 200𝑚𝑚
300
2.397
𝑒𝑎 = 𝑀𝑎𝑥 ( , 0.02𝑚)
300
𝑒𝑎 = 0.02

262
𝑒2 = 0.03
𝑒𝑇𝑜𝑡 = 0.0142 + 0.02 + 0.03 = 𝟎. 𝟎𝟔𝟒𝟐
Design Forces
Nsd = Max (970.88, 962.9) = 970.88
𝑀𝑠𝑑𝑥−𝑥 = 𝑒𝑇𝑜𝑡 ∗ 𝑁𝑠𝑑
𝑀𝑠𝑑𝑥−𝑥 = 0.0431 ∗ 970.88 = 41.84
𝑀𝑠𝑑𝑦−𝑦 = 𝑒𝑇𝑜𝑡 ∗ 𝑁𝑠𝑑
𝑀𝑠𝑑𝑦−𝑦 = 0.0642 ∗ 970.88 = 62.33
Column Reinforcement
 The minimum lateral dimension of column shall be at least 150mm.
 The area of longitudinal reinforcement shall not be less than 0.008Ac or more than
0.08Ac. The upper Limit shall be observed even where bars overlap.
 The minimum number of longitudinal reinforcement bars shall be 6 for bars in a circular
arrangement and 4 bars in a rectangular arrangement.
 The diameter of longitudinal bars shall not be less than 12mm.
 Design constants
o fcd=11.33Mpa
o fyd=260.87Mpa
o As,min=0.008Ac=0.008*400*400 =1280mm²
o As,max=0.08Ac=0.08*400*400 = 12800mm²

263
Reinforcement Calculation:
N sd M sd , x  x
 sd   sd , x  x   sd , y  y 
M sd , y  y
f cd Ac f cd Ac h f cd Ac b
970.88 41.84 62.33
𝑉𝑠𝑑 = 11333.33∗0.4∗0.4 𝜇𝑠𝑑,𝑥−𝑥 = 11333.33∗0.4∗0.4∗0.4 𝜇𝑠𝑑,𝑥−𝑥 = 11333.33∗0.4∗0.4∗0.4
𝑉𝑠𝑑 = 0.6 𝜇𝑠𝑑,𝑥−𝑥 = 0.058 𝜇𝑠𝑑,𝑥−𝑥 = 0.086
Ac f cd
As ,tot 
f yd
4∗𝐴𝑠∗𝑓𝑦𝑑
𝑤= w = 0.4 EBCS part 2 using design chart 13
𝜋ℎ2 ∗𝑓𝑐𝑑
4 ∗ 𝐴𝑠 ∗ 260870
0.4 =
3.14 ∗ 400 ∗ 400 ∗ 11333.33
𝑨𝒔 = 𝟐𝟏𝟖𝟑. 𝟒𝒎𝒎𝟐
Using ∅𝟏𝟖 𝒃𝒂𝒓
𝟐𝟏𝟖𝟑. 𝟒
𝑵𝒖𝒎𝒃𝒆𝒓 𝒐𝒇 𝑩𝒂𝒓 = = 𝟖. 𝟓𝟖 ~ 𝟗𝒃𝒂𝒓
𝝅𝟏𝟖𝟐
𝟒
 Determination of column stirrup diameter

Stirrup diameter ≥ 6𝑚𝑚 or
¼(Ø) =1/4*18 = 4.5
Therefore take 8mm
Spacing of stirrups
12Ø=12*18 = 216mm
Take 210mm Spacing

264
Table 25 Sample Column on Each Floor
Floor P edx edy Mdx Mdy w As N

4 587.41 0.03 0.04 3.9134 4.0285 0.4 1547.85 7
3 658 0.04 0.04 10.92 11.544 0.3 1758.78 7
2 795.48 0.04 0.05 5.345 17.378 0.4 1942.5 8
1 823.47 0.014 0.035 9.37 15.24 0.3 1987.4 8
Ground 859 0.07 0.05 4.85 12.58 0.1 2089.15 9
Basement 952.47 0.021 0.04 5.48 10.48 0.1 2124.87 9
F-column 962.9 0.043 0.064 7.42 34.58 0.4 𝟐𝟏𝟖𝟑. 𝟒 9

265
Chapter Nine
9. Foundation Design
Objective
The objective of this chapter is to design the foundation for the building:
o Introduction
o Proportion and design of isolated footing
9.1. Introduction
Types of foundation and their selection
Types of foundations
We would like to identify the foundation that are encountered in practice that can be classified
into two categories,
These are; - 1. Shallow foundation and
2. Deep foundation
Under shallow foundation the following are prevalent;
a. Wall or continuous foundation
b. Spread or Isolated foundation
c. Mat or Raft foundation
Under deep foundation the following are found
a. Pile
b. Piers and,
c. Caisson foundation
Selection of foundation Type
In selecting the type of foundation we should consider the following points
 Function of the structure
 Load it must carry
 Subsurface condition
 Cost of foundation in comparison with the cost of superstructure

266
Having these point in mind we should apply the following steps in order to arrive at a decision.
1. We would like to obtain at least approximate information concerning the nature of
superstructure and the load to be transmitted to the foundation.
2. To determine the subsurface condition in general way. Wide description should be taken both
on practical and theoretical aspects. Investigating the ground condition concern, basically site
exploration. Therefore, we would like to describe our interest’s to study more about site
exploration for foundation design.
Site Exploration
Site exploration basically consists of investigating the ground condition on which construction is
planned. It is through site exploration that one should arrive at the appropriate foundation for a
given structure. The prediction of settlement and bearing capacity or the investigation of the
safety of an existing structure is an intelligent and satisfactory way and is possible only through
site exploration.
Before actual exploration is carried out we should inspect the site to get preliminary data. These
include; -
a. Topographical characteristics of the place and its surroundings.
b. The type of construction and condition of the existing structure.
c. Soil profile in cuts and quarries
d. High water marks on the old building
e. Photography of the site and adjacent structures

267
9.2. Foundation Design
Foundation design is concerned primarily with ensuring that the movements of a foundation are
within the limits that can be tolerated by the proposed structure without adversely affecting its
functional requirements. Structures vary widely in their function be considered as interrelated
problems.
 Design Approach
The design approach used is limit state design method

Limit State Design Method
A list of limit states to be considered shall be a complied. The following limit state shall be
considered.
 Loss of overall stability
 Bearing resistance failure
 Failure by sliding
 Combined failure in ground and in structure
 Structural failure due to foundation movement
 Excessive settlement
 An acceptable vibration
When selecting design situation for shallow foundation it is especially important to access the
level of ground water table.
In our case ultimate limit state design is chosen;
 Ultimate limit state deign method
 Overall stability
 Failure due to loss of overall stability shall be checked in particular for shallow
foundations in the following situation;
o Near or on inclined site, a natural slope or embankment;
o Near an excavation or retaining wall;
o Near a river, a canal, a lake, a reservoir or the shore;
o Near mine workings or buried structures.

268
 Bearing resistance failure

To demonstrate that a foundation will support the design load with adequate safety against
bearing resistance failure, the following inequality shall be satisfied for all ultimate limit state
load cases and load combinations;
Vd < R d … … … … … ..
Where
Vd is the ultimate limit state design load normal to the foundation base including the weight of
the foundation and of any backfill material. In drained conditions water pressures shall generally
include as action in calculating Vd .
R d is the design bearing resistance of the foundation against normal load, taking into account the
effect of any inclined or eccentric load
When water pressures around the footing are hydrostatic, calculation of Vd may be simplified by
using buoyant weights of structural elements below the water table.
9.2.1. Design solution
Design of Isolated Footing
We use factored load for proportioning and reinforcement design. Using the result from 3D
frame analysis done on ETABS the design procedure is done as follows.
Footing can be classified into Four (4) categories based on the load transferred from the
superstructure to the foundation through column.
Table 26 Grouping footing based on their axial load
Axial load range (KN) Foundation group
Below 500 F-5
800 – 1100 F-4
1100-1300 F-3
1300-1500 F-2
1500 - 1700 F-1

269
NB: In this case all values of output from the ETABS for support reaction is only included in the
interval provided in table above.
Therefore, we can classify footing into group as per interval provided above.
Table 27; Support reaction and footing category

TABLE: Joint Reactions (ETABS OutPut)
Story Label Output FZ kN MX kN- MY kN-m Footing
Case m Group
Base 2 Ultimate 1660.1249 -0.1195 -1.3637 F-1

Base 7 Ultimate 1644.2537 -0.6277 1.0454 F-1
Base 11 Ultimate 1553.6205 -0.4502 0.9536 F-1
Base 6 Ultimate 1523.402 -1.1772 -3.7383 F-1
Base 4 Ultimate 1514.6004 0.6035 1.03 F-1
Base 9 Ultimate 1481.6929 -0.5187 0.3881 F-2
Base 10 Ultimate 1446.1975 -0.6998 0.9057 F-2
Base 3 Ultimate 1434.8912 0.4177 1.1341 F-2
Base 13 Ultimate 1423.2066 -0.1368 -0.9066 F-2
Base 14 Ultimate 1419.8398 -0.8392 -1.8316 F-2
Base 8 Ultimate 1374.7935 -0.9166 1.4894 F-2
Basement 17 Ultimate 1335.8528 2.6744 -11.9573 F-2
Base 5 Ultimate 1290.5867 1.7395 -2.4511 F-3
Base 15 Ultimate 1264.3388 -3.1383 8.1329 F-3
Base 12 Ultimate 1249.7806 -1.8249 -3.2049 F-3
Base 1 Ultimate 1165.8878 1.0374 5.6398 F-3
Basement 21 Ultimate 845.3738 2.38 6.8505 F-4

270
From the foundation category the footing we are going to design is for the maximum value of the
group member. This means footing with maximum value of loading from the category is chosen.

271
Table 28 Footing types to be designed

P (KN) Mx (KNm) My (KNm) Footing
Group
1660.1249 -0.1195 -1.3637 F-1
1481.6929 -0.5187 0.3881 F-2
1297.9967 2.0492 -6.2656 F-3
1091.0971 0.4569 -4.6168 F-4
 Footing F- 1 Design
Pmax = 1660.1249KN
Mx = −0.1195KNm
My = −1.3637KNm
 Foundation depth is to be 1.5 m below basement floor level.
 The stress distribution (contact pressure distribution) is assumed to be linear.
Bearing Capacity
The soil must be capable of carrying the loads from the structure placed up on it without a shear
failure and with the resulting settlements being tolerable for the structure. The design bearing
resistance can be taken from the presumed design bearing pressure for different soils according
to EBCS-7, 1995 ART 6.10.2 Table 6.3 or can be calculated analytically according to EBCS-7,
1995 ART 6.5.22 for drained as well as un-drained conditions.
As per geotechnical investigation reports for projects of Adama the allowable bearing capacity of
soil around Adama is 480 kPa . For a depth of 3.5 m.
 Dimension of column is 400 x 400 mm

Sample;

272
400 mm
400 mm h
Fig.9.1 Isolated Footing
Design of Isolated Footing
The footing is subjected to eccentric load of 1660.1249KN in addition to weight of the soil and
footing self weight.
Assume the weight of the soil and footing 10% of axial load from the column.
10
Therefore; ∑ P = Pmax + 10%P = 1660.124 + (100) ∗ 1660.124 KN = 1826.13 KN
Footing Size Proportioning

From bearing capacity of the soil using the theoretical method
∑P 6ey 6ex
σMax/min = ∗ (1 ± ± )…………∗
A B L
In which;
Mx = −0.1195KNm
My = −1.3637KNm
∑ P = 1826.13 KN
Where;

273
Mx − 0.1195 KNm
ey = = = − 0.000065 m
∑P 1826.13 KN
My − 1.363 KNm
ex = = = − 0.00074 m
∑P 1826.13 KN
Assume Square foundation L= B
Substituting these values in equation*, the dimensions of the footing is calculated as follows
∑P 6ey 6ex
σMax/min = ∗ (1 ± ± )…………∗
A B 1.5B
1826.13 6 ∗ −0.00065 6 ∗ −0.0074
480 = ∗ (1 ± ± )
B∗B B B
By rearranging the equation, we have the following simplified equation. Hence we consider the
case in which the B value becomes smaller.
B3 − 3.104B − 0.1837 = 0
Iterating the equation the value will be B = 1.742 m 𝐭𝐚𝐤𝐞 𝟏. 𝟖 𝐱 𝟏. 𝟖𝟎 𝐦
Stress Distribution
The approximate contact pressure distribution under strip and rectangular symmetrical footings
is derived from the common flexural formula, provided that the considered loading lies within
the kern of the footing.
The stress distribution is assumed to be uniform. The magnitude of the stress at edge of the
footing is determined by the following equation. In our case the footing is assumed to be
rectangular (B = L).
∑P 6ey 6ex
σMax/min = ∗ (1 ± ± )…………∗
A B B
1826.13 6∗(− 0.000065) (6∗− 0.00074)

σA = 1.80∗1.80 ∗ (1 + + ) KN/m2 = 562.0951KN/m2
1.80 1.80
1826.13 (6∗−0.000065) (6∗−0.00074)
σB = 1.80∗1.80 ∗ (1 − + ) KN/m2 = 562.34KN/m2
1.80 1.80
1826.13 (6∗−0.000065) (6∗−0.00074)
σC = 1.80∗1.80 ∗ (1 + − ) KN/m2 = 564.901KN/m2
1.80 1.80
1826.13 (6∗−0.000065) (6∗−0.00074)
σD = 1.80∗1.80 ∗ (1 − − ) KN/m2 = 565.146KN/m2
1.80 1.80
We have the following stress distribution diagram at the edge of footing in four sides.

274
562.34 KN/m 2
562.09 KN/m 2
Y 562.09 KN/m 2
562.34 KN/m 2
564.9 KN/m 2 565.14 KN/m 2
564.9 KN/m 2
565.14 KN/m 2
Figure 28 Stress Distribution Diagram

σA +σB +σC +σD
The average stress distribution is given by: σavg =
4
562.095 + 562.34 + 564.9 + 565.14

=
4
𝛔𝐚𝐯𝐠 = 563.618 𝐊𝐍/𝐦𝟐
𝛔𝐦𝐚𝐱 = 𝟓𝟔𝟓. 𝟏𝟒 𝐊𝐍/𝐦𝟐 < 𝐪𝐚𝐥𝐥−−−−−− 𝑺𝒂𝒇𝒆!!
The Cross section we select is Economical

Design constants
Design strength of materials (Steel and Concrete).
 Concrete
f
cu
- fck = 1.25 = 20MPa
0.85fck 0.85(20MPa)
- fcd = = = 11.33 MPa
Υs 1.5
fck 2/3 (20)2/3

- fctd = 0.21 = 0.21 = 1.03 MPa
Υc 1.5
f 260.87
- 𝑚 = 0.8∗ydf = 0.8∗11.33 = 28.78
cd

275
2.5 2.5
- C1 = = 28.78 = 0.0869
m
- C2 = 0.32 ∗ m2 ∗ fcd = 0.32 ∗ 28.782 ∗ 11.33 = 3003.04

fck 2/3 (20)2/3
- fctd = 0.21 = 0.21 = 1.03MPa
Υc 1.5
 Steel
- Partial safety factor, s = 1.15 for class I works ……….. (EBCS-2, 1995 on table 3.1),
Page 22
- Yield strength, fyk = 300 Mpa
- Design strength
For steel tension and compression:
f yk 300
f yd    260.87Mpa
s 1.15
Structural Design (Depth).
The critical section used for footing depth determination is similar to flat slab section. Those
sections are;
 Punching shear section
 Wide beam section
 Bending moment section.
Punching Shear (Two-way shear)
 This factor generally controls the depth of the footing.

 It is normal practice to provide adequate depth to sustain the shear stress developed
without reinforcement.
Therefor For a given average soil pressure one way drive expressions for determining the depth
of footing necessary withstand a given load.
As per EBCS 2, 1995 the punching shear critical section for footing is at distance 1.5d from the
face of the column as shown below.

276
1.80 m
0.3+3d
0.4+3d
1.80 m
Figure 29 Critical section for punching shear Footing Type F-1

Punching shear force, Pp
Pp = p − σavg Ac … … … … … … … … … … … (1)
Where; p = unfactored axial load
Ac = critical Section area
σavg = average contact pressure
For the structural design, a simplifying assumption is made in which the contact pressure
distribution is assumed uniform and its magnitude is taken as the average of the each side contact
pressure.
The average contact pressure σavg = 563.61 KN/m2 as calculated above.
Punching shear resistance V is given by.
Punching shear resistance, VRD = 0.25fctd k1 K 2 ud
Where; fctd = 1.03Mpa
A
K1 = 1 + 50ρ ≤ 2.0, ρ = steel ratio =
bd
K 2 = 1.6 − d ≥ 1.0
0.5 0.5
Assume, ρ = 𝜌𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 𝑓 = 300 = 0.00167 EBCS − 2 Section 7.2.2.2
Where, u – is the perimeter of critical section

d – is the effective depth

277
K1 = 1 + 50ρ = 1 + 50 ∗ 0.00167 = 1.08

K 2 = 1.6 − d ≥ 1.0, Assume K 2 = 1.0
fctd = 1.03Mpa
Ac = (0.4 + 3d)(0.3 + 3d) , where Ac − area of critical section
But, u = 2(0.4 + 3d) + 2(0.3 + 3d) = (12d + 1.4)
Net punching shear force, Pp = p − σavg ∗ Ac
= 1660.124 − 563.61 ∗ (0.4 + 3d)(0.3 + 3d)
= 1660.124 − 563.61 ∗ (9d2 + 2.16d + 0.12)
Pp = 1660.124 − 5072.4 d2 − 1217.397d − 67.63 … … … … … … … … (∗)
Punching shear resistance, VRD = 0.25fctd k1 K 2 ud
VRD = 0.25 ∗ 1.03 ∗ 103 ∗ 1.08 ∗ 1 ∗ (12d + 1.4) ∗ d
= 278.1 ∗ (12d2 + 1.4d)
VRD = 3337.2d2 + 389.34d … … … … … … … … . . (∗∗)
Equating Eq. (*) and Eq. (**) takes to;
1660.124 − 5072.4 d2 − 1217.397d − 67.63 = 3337.2d2 + 389.34d
−8409.6 d2 − 1606.737d + 1592.494 = 0
X 2 + 0.191X − 0.189 = 0
Solving for, d1 = 0.349 m
Therefore, minimum effective depth required for punching shear is 0.349 m.
Depth from Wide Beam Shear (one way shear)
Diagonal tension
The selected depth using the punching shear criteria may not be adequate to with stand the
diagonal tension developed .hence one should also check the safety against diagonal tension As
per EBCS 2, 1995. The wide beam shear critical section for footing is at distance d from the face
of the column as shown below.
Since it is square footing, But It is different in column section. There for wide beam shear in
each section must be checked.

278
Section-1
Section-2
m
1.80 m
0.3+2d
0.4+2d
m
1.80 m
Figure 30 Critical section for wide beam shear

Along Section 1-1 along (y-y)
Wide beam shear = Vw(1−1) = 𝛔𝐚𝐯𝐠 ∗ 𝐀𝐫𝐞𝐚
Area = B*X
𝐿 𝐶𝑥
Area = (𝐵 ∗ ( − − 𝑑))
2 2
1.8 0.4
= (1.8 ∗ ( 2 − − 𝑑)
2
= (1.26 − 1.8𝑑)
Vw(1−1) = 563.61 * (1.26 − 1.8𝑑)
= (710.14 − 1014.49 𝑑) … … … … … … … . . (∗)
Shear force carried by a concrete perimeter (wide beam shear resistance)
VC = 0.25fctd k1 ∗ K 2 ∗ B ∗ d ∗ 103
K1 = 1 + 50 ∗ ρ = 1 ∗ 50 ∗ 0.00167 = 1.08 ≤ 2.0 … … … … … … … … … ok!
K 2 = 1.6 − d ≥ 1.0, Assume K 2 = 1.0
VC = 0.25 ∗ 1.03 ∗ 1.08 ∗ 1.0 ∗ 1.8 ∗ d ∗ 103 = 500.58 d … … … … … … … . . (∗∗)
Equating equations (*) & (**) and simplifying, the final equation will be
500.58 d = 710.14 − 1014.49 𝑑
𝐝𝟐 = 𝟎. 𝟒𝟔 𝐦

279
Along Section 2-2. (x-x)
Wide beam shear = Vw(2−2) = 𝛔𝐚𝐯𝐠 ∗ 𝐀𝐫𝐞𝐚

Area = B*X
𝐿 𝐶𝑥
Area = (𝐵 ∗ (2 − − 𝑑))
2
1.8 0.3
= (1.8 ∗ ( 2 − − 𝑑)
2
= (1.35 − 1.8𝑑)
Vw(1−1) = 563.61 * (1.35 − 1.8𝑑)
= (760.87 − 1014.49 𝑑) … … … … … … … . . (∗)
Shear force carried by a concrete perimeter (wide beam shear resistance)
VC = 0.25fctd k1 ∗ K 2 ∗ B ∗ d ∗ 103
K1 = 1 + 50 ∗ ρ = 1 ∗ 50 ∗ 0.00167 = 1.08 ≤ 2.0 … … … … … … … … … ok !
K 2 = 1.6 − d ≥ 1.0, Assume K 2 = 1.0
VC = 0.25 ∗ 1.03 ∗ 1.08 ∗ 1.0 ∗ 1.8 ∗ d ∗ 103 = 500.58 d … … … … … … … . . (∗∗)
Equating equations (*) & (**) and simplifying, the final equation will be
500.58 d = 760.87 − 1014.49 𝑑
𝐝𝟑 = 𝟎. 𝟓 𝐦
Therefore, 𝐝 = 𝟓𝟎𝟎 𝐦𝐦 for wide beam shear

280
Critical depth
Comparing these two values of d, obtained from the punching and wide beam shears the
governing depth will be: d= 500 mm
∅
Gross depth, D = d + cover + ∅ + 2
Where d = 500 mm
Cover = 50mm
∅ = 20 mm
20
D = 500 + 50 + 20 + = 580 mm
2
Use D = 580 mm

281
Determination of Design Moment
The critical section for the bending moment is at the face of the support (column).
The section in the x-direction & in the y direction as shown below
562.09 565.14
562.34 564.9
We have the average stress for x-x and y-y section shown above
(562.34+562.09)
Along x-x σavg = = 562.21 KN/m2
2
(564.9+565.14)
Along y-y σavg = = 565.05 KN/m2
2
Bending moment along each section (x-x & y-y) can be determined by the following formula.
B−b 2 1.8 − 0.4 2
Mx−x = σavg ∗ ( ) ∗ 1m = 565.05 ∗ ( ) ∗ 1 = 𝟐𝟕𝟎. 𝟏𝟐𝐊𝐍. 𝐦
2 2
B−b 2 1.8 − 0.4 2
My−y = σavg ∗ ( ) ∗ 1m = 562.21 ∗ ( ) ∗ 1 = 𝟐𝟖𝟒. 𝟒𝟒𝐊𝐍. 𝐦
2 2

282
Check Depth for Flexure
Now, we check depth for maximum moment that is My−y = 𝟐𝟖𝟒. 𝟒𝟒 𝐊𝐍𝐦 = Md .
Mmax
d=√
0.8 b fyd ρm (1 − 0.4 ρm)
284.44 ∗ 106
d=√
0.8 ∗ 1000 ∗ 11.33 ∗ 0.019 ∗ 28.78 (1 − 0.4 ∗ 0.019 ∗ 28.78)
d = 𝟐𝟕𝟏. 𝟎𝟐𝐦𝐦 < deff = 500 mm … … … … … … … . 𝐨𝐤!
Therefore, it is safe for flexure.

Reinforcement Design
Parallel to section - 1 along the Y-direction. Using EBCS2, 1995 .

 𝑚 = 28.78
 𝐶1 = 0.0869
 C2 = 3003.04
𝐴𝑠 = 𝜌 ∗ 𝑏 ∗ 𝑑
1 4 ∗ 284.44 ∗ 106
𝜌= ∗ (0.0869 − √0.0869 2 − ) = 0.00459
2 1000 ∗ (500)2 ∗ 3003.04
 𝜌𝑚𝑖𝑛 < 𝜌 < 𝜌𝑚𝑎𝑥

 0.00167 < 0.00459 < 0.019
𝐀 𝐬𝐱 = 𝟎. 𝟎𝟎𝟒𝟓𝟗 ∗ 𝟏𝟎𝟎𝟎 ∗ 𝟓𝟎𝟎 = 𝟐𝟐𝟗𝟓 𝐦𝐦²

283
Parallel to section – 2 Along the X-direction. Using EBCS2, 1995.
𝐴𝑠 = 𝜌 ∗ 𝑏 ∗ 𝑑
1 4 ∗ 270.12 ∗ 106
𝜌= ∗ (0.0869 − √0.0869 2 − ) = 0.0043
2 1000 ∗ (500)2 ∗ 3003.04
 𝜌𝑚𝑖𝑛 < 𝜌 < 𝜌𝑚𝑎𝑥

 0.00167 < 0.0043 < 0.019
𝐀 𝐬𝐱 = 𝟎. 𝟎𝟎𝟒𝟑 ∗ 𝟏𝟎𝟎𝟎 ∗ 𝟓𝟎𝟎 = 𝟐𝟏𝟓𝟎 𝐦𝐦²
Spacing of Reinforcement bars.

Along x-x axis
𝑏𝑎𝑠
𝑆=
𝐴𝑠
Where:
Assume ∅ 16
𝑏𝑎𝑠 1000 ∗ 200.96
𝑆𝑝𝑎𝑐𝑖𝑛𝑔 = = = 93.46mm
𝐴𝑠 2150
Ascalc 2150
No of bar = = 200.96 = 10.69 use 11
as
Provide: # 𝟏𝟏 ∅ 𝟏𝟔 𝒄/𝒄 𝟗𝟎𝒎𝒎

284
Along y-y axis.

𝑏𝑎𝑠
𝑆=
𝐴𝑠
Where:
Assume ∅ 16
𝑏𝑎𝑠 1000 ∗ 200.96
𝑆𝑝𝑎𝑐𝑖𝑛𝑔 = = = 87.56 mm
𝐴𝑠 2295
Ascalc 2295
No of bar = = 200.96 = 11.42 use 12
as
Provide: # 𝟏𝟐 ∅ 𝟏𝟔 𝒄/𝒄 𝟖𝟎𝒎𝒎

285
Detail of Reinforcement for Foundation

Check bond length (Embedment Length)
 The reinforcement bar subjected to direct tension must be firmly anchored if it is not to
be pulled out of the concrete.
 Bars subjected to forces induced by flexure must be similarly anchored to develop their
design stresses.
Beam
dx T+ dT
dx
Consider beam element length dx, with change in stress on the opposite face.
 Tension pull out force , dT = As ∗ fyd
 Anchorage force , (π ∗ ∅) ∗ dX ∗ fbd
Where: (π ∗ ∅) is circumference of circle
fbd design bond strengh (Mpa)
fbd = fctd − 𝐹𝑜𝑟 𝑝𝑙𝑎𝑖𝑛 𝑏𝑎𝑟
fbd = 2 ∗ fctd − 𝐹𝑜𝑟 𝑑𝑒𝑓𝑜𝑟𝑚𝑒𝑑 𝑏𝑎𝑟
Equating pule out force and anchorage.
dT = Fa
As ∗ fyd = (π ∗ ∅) ∗ dX ∗ fbd
dX = (As ∗ fyd )/(π ∗ ∅ ∗ fbd )
dX = (∅ ∗ fyd )/(4 ∗ fbd )
Since we are using deformed bar so:
dX = (∅ ∗ fyd )/(8 ∗ fctd )
Where: dX = lb = the basic anchorage length to prevent pull out
fyd = 260.87 𝑚𝑝𝑎
fctd = 1.03 𝑚𝑝𝑎
Bond Length in the longer column direction (0.4m)

286
lb(Required) = (∅ ∗ fyd )/(8 ∗ fctd )

lb(Required) = (16 ∗ 260.87)/(8 ∗ 1.03)
lb(Required) = 506.54 𝑚𝑚
1800 400
lb(Avilable) = ( − − 50) = 650 mm
2 2
lb(Required) < lb(Avilable) There for no need of bend the bars.

Bond Length in the longer column direction (0.4m)
1800 400
lb(Avilable) = ( − − 50) = 650 mm
2 2
lb(Required) < lb(Avilable) There for no need of bend the bars.

287
Footing Type F-1 Reinforcement Detail

288
Design solution for all footings

Table 29 Proportioning and Stress Distribution
Ty P Mx My L B
ex ey σB (𝐾𝑝𝑎)σC (𝐾𝑝𝑎)σD (𝐾𝑝𝑎) σavg (𝐾𝑝𝑎)
σA (𝐾𝑝𝑎)
pe KN (KN.m) (KN.m) m m
1660.12 -0.119 -1.363 -
F-1 0.0000 1. 562.0 562.3 564.90 565.14
-0.0007 65 8 1.8 95 40 1 6 563.62
1481.69 -0.518 0.388 -
F-2 0.0003 1. 563.8 565.0 562.85 564.12
0.0002 18248 7 1.7 05 72 7 4 563.965
1297.99 2.049 -6.265 0.0014 1. 551.5 545.5 563.90
F-3
-0.0043 35226 6 1.6 53 50 569.91 6 557.730
1091.09 0.456 -4.616 0.0003 1. 603.2 601.2 623.44 621.44
F-4
-0.0038 80687 4 1.4 50 52 05 2 612.346
Table 30 Depth Determination and check depth for flexure

Shear Check depth
Two Critical M x-x M y-y
One way Gross depth deff dcal Remark
way depth (KN.m) (KN.m)
(mm) (m)
Type d1(m) d1(m) d2(m) d(mm) D(mm)
F-1 0.349 0.46 0.5 500 560 502 270.12 284.44 319.5944 OK!!
366.88
F-2 0.23 0.34 0.25 340 400 342 OK!!
5 366.269 307.8094
329.13
F-3 0.31 0.39 0.34 390 450 392 OK!!
1 340.144 296.3799
301.12
F-4 0.34 0.43 0.36 430 490 432 OK!!
5 311.220 283.4986

289
Table 31 Reinforcement
Asy-y
𝜌𝑎𝑐𝑡𝑢𝑎𝑙 Asx-x Provided AS
Type 𝜌x-x 𝜌y-y mm2 mm2 x-x y-y

F-1 0.0043 0.0045 2150 2295 11 ∅ 16 c/c 90 mm 12 ∅ 16 c/c 80 mm
F-2 0.014622 0.014591 4971.453 4960.994 11 ∅ 24 c/c 90 mm 11 ∅ 24 c/c 80 mm
F-3 0.009284 0.009638 3620.685 3759.014 12 ∅ 20 c/c 80 mm 12 ∅ 20 c/c 80 mm
F-4 0.006768 0.007016 2910.112 3017.033 10 ∅ 20 c/c 100 mm 10 ∅ 20 c/c 100 mm

290
CHAPTER TEN
10. Conclusion and recommendation
10.1 Conclusion
Accomplishing these thesis paper required a hardworking and we had our ups and downs
throughout the design process in designing these B+G+4 building, and we tried to design
each part of the building with careful analysis and design as much as possible to get the final
design result. In design of this building we tried to answer the three basic design questions
which includes Design of members was made economical, safe and workable with good
aesthetics. In doing this building standard of our country Ethiopian Building Code Standard
(EBCS-1995) was largely referring deciding on size and proportions of reinforced concrete.
Final year project enables us as a group Members to search and to learn more than what have
been discussed through the class discussion. It helps us to summarize what have been learnt
during their study. It also helped us to develop working in teams, understanding with each
other and develop good interaction with each other in accomplishing each task we performed
according to schedule.
On analysis of this project many tedious calculation works were compiled with ETABS and the
result was taken as it is for designing purpose ,as the adequacy of each building elements was
understandable by the program me and can generate the output results with acceptable sign
convention. From this what we conclude is that if this program me is not available it is so
difficult to complete this project with in this time constraint. In accordance with our design and
analysis, the structure is economical and safe against lateral and different load application, but
for actual implementation as the soil bearing capacity for the foundation was taken from relevant
assumption, it needs further soil exploration and modification of foundations accordingly.
In general doing this project enables us to develop self-confidence up on what we learnt in class
and introduce to what we have to decide in designing building.

291
10.2 Recommendation
For instructor
 Since Site plan is not given it is difficult to determine the type of footing pad and also
some specification not mentioned in drawing.
 It is butter to learn practical instead of theory
 Software like Sap, Etabs & Excel are butter if they are given as subject course in
university.
Generally

 The quality of materials should fulfill the specification given in the else there may be
failure due to using less qualified material.
 The overall works of the building should be inspected and supervised throughout the
entire construction time in order to achieve the required design strength and be sure is
that should be serve for its intended purpose.
 During the project time, there should be workshops which elaborate what seams the
project in a real world; to do so the department might have close relationship with design
office.
 Finally, as it was recognized analysis and design of any engineering structure is
supported with computer programming, hence we recommend that it had better if
computer programming for civil engineers is given as a subject in order to make the
students familiar with different software.

292
References
 Ethiopian Building Code Standard (EBCS- 1, 2, 3, 7, & 8 – 1995).

 Alemayehu Tefera ‘’Soil Mechanics’’ Addis Abeba university press, Addis Abeba
Ethiopia,1981
 Arthur H.Nilson, “Design of concrete structures”, McGraw-Hill, New York,2003
 Boweles J.E. ,‘’foundation Analysis and design”, McGraw-Hill, New York,1968
 Arrora K.R, “soil-structure interaction analysis for footing” PH.D Thesis Indian
institute of Technology, Delhi 1980.
 Exercise books & hand outs:-
 RC I & II
 Structural Design(SD)
 Theory of Structure I & II
 Foundation Engineering I & II
 Strength of Materials I & II

293
Appendix 1 Mass Weight Calculation
Appendix 2 Structural Detailing in AutoCAD

New Final Sami To Be Print With Cover

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

New Final Sami To Be Print With Cover

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

RIFT VALLEY UNIVERSITY

DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING

Project on Structural Analysis and Design of B+G+4 Mixed-Use

SEPTEMBER, 2020 G.C

Name Signature Date

1. Samuel Ofkela ____________________ ____________________

RIFT VALLEY UNIVERSITY

RIFT VALLEY UNIVERSITY

RIFT VALLEY UNIVERSITY

CHAPTER THREE .....................................................................................................................44

RIFT VALLEY UNIVERSITY

CHAPTER SIX ..........................................................................................................................209

RIFT VALLEY UNIVERSITY

RIFT VALLEY UNIVERSITY

RIFT VALLEY UNIVERSITY

Appendix -1- Mass Weight Calculation

RIFT VALLEY UNIVERSITY

RIFT VALLEY UNIVERSITY

RIFT VALLEY UNIVERSITY

1.2.1. General Objectives

 To experience the comprehensive design requirements and apply the engineering

 To account for other design consideration such as cost, construction environment,

RIFT VALLEY UNIVERSITY

 Design of floor slabs

 Design of beams and columns

Concrete grade C-25

 c  1.5 (Ordinary loading) [EBCS – 2, 1995 table 3.1]

RIFT VALLEY UNIVERSITY

𝐶2 = 0.32𝑚2 𝑓𝑐𝑑 = 3003.0

1.4 Design load

RIFT VALLEY UNIVERSITY

RIFT VALLEY UNIVERSITY

2.2.1. Wind load analysis for our building

 General procedures of wind load analysis

Generally, we should follow the following steps in analyzing wind loads

 Determine site design wind speed and basic velocity pressure

RIFT VALLEY UNIVERSITY

Table 1.Terrain Category and related parameters

Category Terrain KT z0 (m) zmin (m)

Lakes with at least 5km fetch upwind and smooth flat

III Suburban or industrial areas and permanent Forests 0.22 0.3 8

Urban areas in which at least 15% of the surface is covered

o Terrain factor, 𝐊 𝐓 = 𝟎. 𝟐𝟒,

RIFT VALLEY UNIVERSITY

Lu , shallow slope (0.05 < Φ < 0.3)

RIFT VALLEY UNIVERSITY

Exposure coefficient, 𝐂𝐞 (𝐳):

𝑪𝒓 (𝒛) = 𝟎. 𝟕𝟑𝟓 , 𝒄𝒕 (𝒛) = 1, 𝒌𝑻 = 0.24

RIFT VALLEY UNIVERSITY

i. External wind pressure:

𝑊𝑒 = 𝑞𝑟𝑒𝑓 𝑐𝑒 (𝑧𝑒 )𝑐𝑝𝑒

𝒒𝒓𝒆𝒇 = Reference mean wind pressure

RIFT VALLEY UNIVERSITY

Reference Wind Velocity

𝑽𝒓𝒆𝒇 = 𝑪𝑫𝑰𝑹 𝑪𝑻𝑬𝑴 𝑪𝑨𝑳𝑻 𝑽𝒓𝒆𝒇,𝟎

The external wind pressure 𝑊𝑒 will be

ii. Internal wind pressure:

RIFT VALLEY UNIVERSITY

External Pressure coefficients

RIFT VALLEY UNIVERSITY

Figure 1 Key for Flat Roofs

b= width of the building = 16.55 m

1. Samuel Ofkela